JP2019081099A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: privilege game performance means for performing a first privilege game when a first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed in a first display means and for performing a second privilege game when a second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed in a second display means; period discrimination means for discriminating a dynamic display period which is to be displayed in the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result and in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed; presentation determination means for determining a presentation corresponding to a dynamic display of the second identification information to be performed during the dynamic display period discriminated by the period discrimination means; and presentation performance means for performing the presentation determined by the presentation determination means. Therefore, amusement of a player can be improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player There are some games for which an advantageous bonus game is performed.

JP, 2012-217766, A

  However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 displays a first determination means capable of performing the first determination, and first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means. 1 display means, first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means A first dynamic display period determination means for determining, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means, and a second dynamic display means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means Dynamic display period determination means, and the first display means indicates a first determination result specific to the first display means When the first identification information is displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, The first identification information that is to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the first specific determination result is dynamic. A period determining means for determining a displayed dynamic display period, and an effect for determining an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information performed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means It has a determination means and an effect execution means which performs the said effect determined by the effect determination means.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the effect determining means includes: the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means; and a game content of the first benefit game. Based on the above, the effect is determined.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to be executed than the first determination, and the first gaming state than the second determination. It has a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state which makes the determination easy to be executed, and the game state setting means is displayed by the first identification information for indicating the specific first judgment result. The first gaming state is executed during a dynamic display period in which the first identification information to be displayed is dynamically displayed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the first bonus game to be executed by the bonus game executing means is usually a first bonus game and its first bonus game. Also has a first bonus game setting means capable of setting a small first bonus game with little bonus to be awarded to the player, and the first dynamic display period decision means comprises a first period and a first period thereof. It is possible to determine a longer second period, and the effect determining means executes the small first bonus game by the bonus game executing means, and the second period is determined by the period determining means. The same effect is determined in the case where the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means and the first period is determined by the period determination means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the effect determining means executes the first normal bonus game by the bonus game executing means, and the second determining means determines the second time by the period judging means. When a period is determined, a specific effect is determined.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first determination means capable of performing the first determination, and the first display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means; First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and first motion for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means Display period determination means, second determination means capable of executing the second determination, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and second display thereof Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the means, and second dynamic display period determination for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means Means, and said first identification for indicating a first determination result specific to said first display means When the information is displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second bonus game is executed. Dynamic display in which the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the first specific determination result is dynamically displayed A period determining means for determining a period, an effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to a dynamic display of the second identification information performed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means, and an effect thereof And an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the determining means.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first benefit game.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, a game state capable of setting a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination Dynamic display including setting means, wherein the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result During the period, the first gaming state is executed.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2 or 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, as the first bonus game to be executed by the bonus game executing means, a normal first bonus game and a small first bonus game having fewer benefits to be awarded to the player than the normal first bonus game are set. It has possible first bonus game setting means, and the first dynamic display period determining means can determine the first period and the second period longer than the first period, and the effect is determined When the small first bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit, and the second period is determined by the period determination unit, the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit. The same effect is determined in the case where it is executed and the first period is determined by the period determination means.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the effect determining means determines the specific effect when the first normal bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. .

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production which is indicated with the 3rd design display device in 1st execution form. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the ending of the big hit game in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing an example of the display contents in a definite change in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when the 2nd special symbol is not changed after the change start of the 1st special symbol in the 1st embodiment, and (b) is the 1st execution It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd special symbol making a small hit in RUSH in a form. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when the 2nd special symbol is in the midst of change after the start of the change of the first special symbol in the 1st embodiment, and (b) is the 1st execution It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd special symbol stopping a fluctuation | variation during the hitting | batter fluctuation | variation of the 1st special symbol in form. (A) is a figure showing an example in the state where the result of change indication of the 1st special symbol became big hit A in RUSH in a 1st embodiment, (b) is RUSH in a 1st embodiment It is a figure showing an example of a state where the result of change display of the 1st special symbol in it is big hit C or big hit D. (A) is a figure showing a card forgetting alert screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing timings for displaying the card forget alert screen in the first embodiment is there. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a schematic view schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of main controller 110. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic view It is the model which showed the content of the 2nd per random number table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is the model which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table typically. It is the model which showed the content of the table for common use typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the time reduction / probability change table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the latency confirmation table. It is the model which showed the content of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table typically. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table. It is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device in a 1st embodiment. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B-D. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation under-execution processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 out-of-variation fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 out-of-variation change pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation under-execution processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a Tokusatsu 2 off stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining frequency update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation resumption processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figures 1 performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figures 2 performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the various counter update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flow chart showing rush rush command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing additional effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 16 a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. Port 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the out port 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of FIG. The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with thin plate materials, and various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side are formed so as to be invisible to the player. The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed by a tapping screw etc. from the front side of 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37A, 37A, 37B, 37C) provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62 on the upper right side of the game area 37B) is provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays information according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It will be. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B), a ball enters the first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), or It is configured to be used properly depending on whether or not the second ball entrance 640 has entered the ball. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, an upper first ball entrance 64 b 1 and a lower first ball entrance 64 b 2 are provided as lottery triggers for the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are shown, the description will be made using only the term of the first ball entrance 64.

  Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state, the time saving state, or the normal state by the lighting state with the LED, or the lighting state whether the fluctuation is in progress. Indicated by whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a certain variation jackpot or a symbol or an outlier symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a small hit symbol by a lighted state, and indicates the number of holding balls by a lighted state The seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when one of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 enters a ball. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types to be determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 2R probability variation jackpots, 15R hour minors, 2R hour minors are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is the jackpot that the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state of special symbols after a jackpot of 15 rounds, a probability state of being a normal symbol high probability state (setting) Yes, "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that sets the transition to a probability change state in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to the high probability state after the jackpot of 2 rounds. In addition, “15 R hour shorts hit” is the low probability state of special symbol after maximum hit number of 15 rounds, the time short state in which the normal symbol is high probability state, for a predetermined number of fluctuation (for example, 50 times) ) A jackpot to be set, "2R hour jackpot" is a jackpot for which the time saving state is set for a predetermined number of fluctuation times (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot of 2 rounds .

  In addition, the "special symbol high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the special gaming state. The "normal symbol high probability state" is a state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, in other words, a gaming state in which the motorized role 64a can be easily opened.

  In addition, in the gaming state (probable change state, time saving state) in which the "normal pattern high probability state" is set, not only the hitting probability of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, but also the lower first entry ball slot 64b2 As the time when the motorized accessory 64a attached to is released, a long time is set in comparison with the gaming state (latency state, normal state) in which "a low probability state of a normal symbol" is set. When the motorized part 64a is in the open state (opened state), the ball is moved to the lower first entrance 64b2 in comparison with the case where the motorized part 64a is closed (closed state). It becomes easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the definite change state or the time reduction state, the ball is likely to be won to the lower first entrance 64b2, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition to changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 or changing the opening time thereof during the definite change state or the short time state, it is performed once. The number of times the motorized accessory 64a is opened may be changed to be larger than that in the normal state. In addition, during probability change state or time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed, and the electric symbol 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened and the electric symbol is open for one time and once At least one of the number of times of opening 64a may be changed. Further, during the definite change state or the short time state, the time for which the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is opened or the number of times the motorized accessory 64a is opened per one operation does not change, Only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the ball entering the ball into either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning) in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. The third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs the variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) while synchronizing with the variable display, and the ball to the through gate 67 The 2nd symbol display device (not shown) comprised with LED which carries out the fluctuation | variation display of the normal symbol (2nd symbol) by using passage as a trigger is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12). For example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the first symbol display device 81 A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  Thus, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol is dynamically moved. By displaying the display mode to the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 ( For example, even if the processing load of the main control unit 110 is reduced by blinking on and off in units of 0.1 seconds, the movement of the third symbol set by the sound lamp control unit 113 Dynamic display mode that can suggest that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot for the player by variably setting the dynamic display mode, for example, based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol) 3) The presentation aspect using the design It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol of "o" and the symbol of "x" for a predetermined time as a normal symbol (the second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized prize 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 It is configured to be activated (activated) for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variation display of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state (probability state, time saving state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol as the gaming state Is set to be Thereby, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the winning lottery can be performed more than the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the chance of becoming a win in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 to be in the open state.

  Therefore, it is possible to set the gaming state in which the ball is likely to be won to the lower first entrance 64b2 in the probability changing state and the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the definite variation state is set as the gaming state and when the time saving state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed on the screen to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game mode. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with fun inferring the current game situation.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of gaming states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same as the dynamic display aspect of the third symbol or the background aspect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 Are configured to set the display mode of. Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is suppressed that the player can easily grasp what the current gaming state is by the operation state of the motorized role 64a. be able to.

  The probability change state may be increased during the definite change state or the short time state, or the open time or the open frequency of the motorized combination 64a per contact may be increased, or the like. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the ball entrance 64b2, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is set shorter than in the normal state during the definite change state or in the short time state, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state Also, the opening time and the opening number of the motorized accessory 64a for one hit may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area (right area) of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured such that a part of the balls that flow down the gaming board can pass through among the balls fired to the gaming board. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the positive change state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol), the short time state (special There are four gaming states: low probability state of symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

  That is, when the latent state is set, the variation time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol which is more likely to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another gaming state By defining the length to be shorter than that in the case where it is set, it is possible to most efficiently execute the lottery advantageous to the player.

  In the first embodiment, in order to make the lottery of the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first variable is partially changed The first specified winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds × 1 time, 0.2 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times). For this reason, in the second special symbol lottery, even if you do not win the jackpot, you will be given many opportunities to get the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a and obtain the winning ball, so the first special symbol It will be more advantageous than the lottery. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the description, the result of the loose lottery where the first specified winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as "small hit".

  In the second special symbol lottery, in addition to the big hit, it is configured to open the first specified winning opening 65a also when it becomes a small hit, in the latent state with a short variation time of the second special symbol prize ball Can continue to increase. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of being in the latent state. In a general game machine, the probability change state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, since the latent state is more advantageous than the probability change state, novel game characteristics can be provided.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous) Adopts a fluctuation method). As a result, even while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a stop symbol of big hit or small hit, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with the stop stop pattern. In this way, it is possible to prevent the other variable display from being determined and displayed as a win or small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the jackpot or the small hit may be repeatedly started.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and a flow of balls fired toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of this embodiment is configured to divide the game area into the left area and the right area by the variable display unit 80 disposed in the central part of the game area. .

  In the present embodiment, the fired ball does not pass the far ball prevention valve 68 until the operating handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (clockwise) from the initial position (the state where the player is not rotated). The ball is fired with a certain degree of firing strength. Therefore, the fired ball finally flows back through the discharge channel formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a far ball. The fowl ball that has flowed back backwards passes through the start position of the discharge flow path (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown) is allowed to flow down to the upper plate 17. By configuring in this way, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 in order to cause the ball to be fired with a desired firing intensity, the foul ball remains in the firing path and Can be used to prevent problems.

  Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state where the player is not turned), the ball is fired with a firing intensity that flows down the left area described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees which is the maximum amount of rotation of the operation handle 51), the ball is fired with a firing intensity that flows down the above-mentioned right side region.

  That is, the present embodiment is configured to be able to vary the area in which the ball flows down based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the operation of the player. Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set as the gaming state, the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball flows down the left area. It is not a game to be adjusted and performed (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), but a game performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right area is played (hereinafter referred to as right-handed game) It is configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, while the gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the player may maintain the state where the operation handle 51 is rotated to the upper limit (the state rotated 120 degrees). Thus, the player can easily play an appropriate game.

  Next, the left side area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Details will be described later, but in the first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability state), definite variation state (Special symbol high probability state: normal symbol high probability state) or latent condition (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol low probability state) is configured to be set. Also, the jackpot gaming state to be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is won for the big hit, and the small hitting gaming state to be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol is won for the small hit are set. It is configured.

  Among them, when the game state is set to the normal state, the time reduction state, the probability change state, the variable display unit 80 is made to perform the left strike game to make the ball flow down to the left area of the game board 13 The game method is guided to the player using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 provided, and the ball is allowed to flow down to the left area of the game board 13 when the latent state is set. In order to play the game, the player is guided to the game method using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, during the jackpot gaming state or the small hitting gaming state, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) of the player is configured to be guided in accordance with the gaming state before the winning.

  In addition, as a guidance method of each game method (left strike game, right strike game), for example, it is configured to always display a game method suitable for the current game state, or only after switching when the game method is switched The game method may be configured to be displayed. In addition, when the game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) which is easily set for a long period among the left-handed game and the right-handed game is a normal game, and a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed. A guidance may always be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 so that the guidance display is not performed when the left hitting game is performed.

  As in the present embodiment, in the case where there are two types of gaming methods to be selected by the player, the other gaming method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one of the gaming methods. That is, it becomes possible to guide a plurality of gaming methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to introduce the gaming method to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, by not displaying a specific display mode, a configuration may be used to notify the player of the gaming method, or may be configured to notify the player using sound or a lamp.

  In the left area of the game board 13, a through gate 67 and a general winning hole 63 are disposed. Further, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 is provided at a lower position of the variable display unit 80 so that a ball flowing down the left side area can enter the ball. Then, a lower first ball entrance 64b2 to which the electric accessory 64a is attached is provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1. When the electric winning object 64a is hit in the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery executed upon the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2. It is configured to be variably operated from the ball difficult (impossible) closed state (first state) to the open state (second state) in which the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b 2 (enabled). ing.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the variation of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed When a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where it is not set), the lottery of the special view 1 is executed. That is, entry of a ball into the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry port 64b2 is an opportunity to execute the drawing of the first special symbol.

  In addition, in the state where it is not possible to newly execute the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (the variation of special figure 1 is already executed, or the big hit game and the small hit game are being executed) When the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, it has memory means to store the right of the ball entering the ball, with a predetermined number (four) as the upper limit ing.

  Therefore, since the player can continuously play the game while the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, the operation of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, it is provided only in the memory | storage means which memorize | stores the right which the ball | bowl entered, and the 1st special symbol.

  Eighty percent of the balls flowing down the left side area by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and approximately 8% of the fired balls (8 balls per 100 balls) enter the upper first entrance 64b1. A ball channel is formed by a structure such as a plurality of nails and a windmill so as to ball. Also, when the motorized accessory 64a is in the closed state, the ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is about 0%, and when the motorized accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first ball inlet The ball flow path is formed so that approximately 25% of the balls enter 64b 2. That is, it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball in the order of the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (motorized item 64a open state), the upper first ball inlet 64b1, and the lower first ball inlet 64b2 (motorized item 64a closed state) It is configured to be

  As described above, the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are configured to give the player the privilege of paying out the prize balls, in addition to the benefit of executing the drawing of the first special symbol. It is configured to pay out four prize balls to the player every time one ball enters the ball. In the present embodiment, the same number (four) of award balls is awarded when the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different numbers of winning balls may be set for each.

  On the other hand, in the right area of the game board 13, a second entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided. The second entrance port 640 is configured such that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball, and a plurality of approximately 50% of the balls flowing down the right area enter the ball. The nail forms a ball channel. Here, the ball that has not entered the second ball entrance 640 flows downward toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right area.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is long as a time (variation time) from when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed until the lottery result is displayed The variation time of time (10 minutes) is set, and in the state where the latent state is set, a short variation time (1 second) is set.

  That is, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is possible to make a right-handed game rather than entering a ball into the first entrance 64 to perform a left-handed game and perform a first special symbol lottery. It is easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 to perform the drawing of the second special symbol, but it is easier to enter the ball, but since the fluctuation time of a long time (10 minutes) is set, gaming efficiency is It will be very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player performs a left hitting game and executes the lottery of the first special symbol.

  In addition, since the second ball entry port 640 is set with one winning ball, the right hitting game is performed with the normal state set, and the ball fired in the right hitting game at a rate of about 50% Even if the second ball entrance 640 is made to enter the ball, the ball does not increase.

  Furthermore, when the time saving state or the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the electric combination 64a is easily released. However, since the through gate 67 serving as the lottery trigger for the ordinary symbol for opening the electric part 64a is provided only in the left side area, the lower first ball entry port 64b2 where the ball can enter the ball easier than in the normal state In order to cause the ball to enter, the player is made to play a left strike game.

  On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol becomes a low probability state and the electrically operated part 64a becomes difficult to open, and as described above, the second special symbol changes for a short time Since a fluctuation time of (one second) is set, it is appropriate to play a right-handed game and execute a lottery of a second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit (win probability about 1/2). When the player wins a small hit, the first variable winning device 65 opens for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small hitting game, and 10 for one ball entering the first variable winning device 65. It is configured to be awarded an award ball.

  That is, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the player performs the right-handed game continuously to draw the second special symbol aiming for the small hit, the small hit game, and the like. Can be run continuously.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the second variable winning device 650 is disposed at the lowermost position of the game area. The second variable winning device 650 is opened so that the pivoting door 650f is actuated to the front side and the second specified winning opening 650a is in an open state where the ball can be won when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery. It is The second variable winning device 650 is configured such that a ball which has flowed down the left area by the left hitting game and a ball which has flowed down the right area by the right hitting game can uniformly enter the ball. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continued, and the game method for the player may be performed. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

  When the ball enters the first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2) mentioned above, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 Is turned on, and the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 12) draws a jackpot due to the turning on of the first entrance switch, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. Be

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, the first entry ball slot 64 is a winning opening where four balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball enters the ball, and the second entry ball hole 640 has one ball when the ball enters the ball. It is one of the winning openings to be paid out as a winning ball. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first upper ball entrance 64b1, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 Are the same (4 for both) and different from the number of prize balls (one) to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry ball opening 640, but the ball enters the upper first entry ball opening 64b1 The number of winning balls to be paid out in the case where they are paid may be different from the number of winning balls to be paid out when the balls enter the lower first entrance 64b2.

  In this case, for example, the number of winning balls in the first upper ball entry 64b1 is set to 4 and the number of winning balls in the lower first ball entry 64b2 is set to 2, and a normal state in which the balls are difficult to enter is set. The bonus for the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is enlarged in the case where the ball is easy to enter the ball when a specific gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) is set. 1 Even if the ball enters the ball slot 64b2 frequently, the player may not be allowed to excessively earn the winning ball, or the number of balls on the upper first ball slot 64b1 is four, the lower first The number of award balls of the entrance 64b2 may be set to five so that the player can be provided with a large bonus when a specific gaming state (probable change state, time reduction state) is set.

  In addition, the same number as the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the sphere enters the second entrance 640 (for example, 5 both) S) may be configured.

  The lower first ball entrance 64b2 is accompanied by a motorized jack 64a. The motorized symbol 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the motorized symbol 64a is in the closed state (restricted state), and the ball is difficult to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display (lottery of the normal symbol) of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role thing 64a is in the open state (permissible state), and the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter than in the normal condition, and the second symbol is displayed as a variation in the second symbol. In this case, the symbol of “o” is easily displayed, and the number of times the motorized accessory 64a is in the open state (permissible state) is increased. Furthermore, during the definite change state or the short time state, the time during which the motorized accessory 64a is opened is also longer than that during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2 during the definite change state or the short time state as compared with the normal state.

  As described above, the lower first ball entry port 64b2, ie, the ball entry port accompanied by the electric part 64a, is a state (first state) in which the ball is likely to enter the ball according to the set gaming state. A state (second state) in which the ball is difficult to enter can be set. That is, from the viewpoint of the ease of entering the ball, the first state is an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the second state is disadvantageous to the player (in comparison to the first state). It becomes.

  Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (when the first special symbol lottery is executed) and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (second special symbol lottery And the probability of becoming a big hit is the same, and if a low probability state of a special symbol is set, a drawing that makes a big hit is executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280) When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the lottery that is a big hit is executed with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) which is easier to hit than the low probability state. However, the type of jackpot selected (set) when jackpot is set is set to be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment causes the player to shoot the ball in the manner (gaming method) according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 as "left strike (left strike game)" and "right strike". It is possible to make it change to "strike (right strike game)". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. The balls which flow down the game area, and which have not won any of the winning openings (ball entry) 63, 64b 1, 64 b 2, 65 a, 640, 650 a are shown through the out opening 66. Not be guided to the ball discharge path. The out port 66 is disposed below the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In the first embodiment, the game area is configured to have one out slot 66, but other configurations may be used, and a plurality of two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

  Thus, by providing a plurality of out-ports 66, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally collecting the balls fired in the game area at one place (the place where the out-ports 66 are disposed) Since it lose | eliminates, the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of the various apparatuses which comprise a game area can be raised. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an outlet dedicated to the ball flowing down the left region and an outlet dedicated to the ball flowing down the right region. When a plurality of out ports are provided, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the ball entry port is an out port. This prevents the player from being given an unpleasant sensation due to the fact that no benefit is given despite the ball entering the ball entry port (actually the out port) provided in the game area. be able to.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  Also, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol (the decorative symbol dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine types of main symbols attached with the numbers “1” to “9”. Each of the main symbols is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” on the rear symbols that simulate various animals. Specifically, for example, the number “1” is attached to the rear symbol imitating an elephant, and the number “2” is attached to the rear symbol imitating a lion. In this manner, the display pattern of the rear symbol is displayed to the player even during the dynamic display of the third symbol by setting the third symbol to be a display mode in which the rear symbol and the numbers are associated with each other and synthesized. The type of the third symbol is roughly grasped by the color, outline, size, etc.), and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of the third symbol is surely identified by identifying the number attached to the rear symbol Can be made to understand.

  In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode and the number may be changed. good. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed. It is possible to provide a game that does not come bored. In addition, the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol is set to be regularly changed according to, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol or the set gaming state, as the third symbol. The prediction accuracy of the game content based on the display mode (combination of the rear symbol and the number) to be stopped and displayed can be enhanced, and it is possible to provide the player with fun to make predictions.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variation display is finished It is configured to generate a big hit later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed. Furthermore, this embodiment is configured to win a small hit as a lottery result of the special symbol, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, "341") It is displayed stopped by. In the present embodiment, the combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed is made different according to the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the lottery result can be easily understood for the player, but the present invention is limited thereto. For example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the case where it is a small hit, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower two, and about 3/4 of the upper side is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. About 1⁄4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, upper, middle and lower three symbol rows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 and the variable display is scrolled in the horizontal direction (usually from right to left) with periodicity for each symbol row L1 to L3 Is done. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower pattern row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the downward sloping diagonal lines and the upward sloping diagonal lines in the main display area Dm are set as the effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. At each game, the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a predetermined period (one second or more), it is determined whether the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot) It can be suppressed that it is overlooked). Also, if the combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbol which is stopped and displayed is the combination which corresponds to the fact that it is the combination which falls off, there is a retention ball, after the 1 seconds stop indication (confirmation indication), fluctuation indication corresponding to the lottery based on the holding sphere Is started. In addition, when several holding balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entering ball in time.

  On the other hand, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second (confirmed display) in the state where there is no holding ball, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. . This state continues until a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) elapses, or a new ball enters for either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped (fixed display), a demonstration effect (guest waiting demo screen) indicating that a game is not being executed is displayed. .

  It is rare that the player does not enter the ball into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 despite the fact that the player continuously launches the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Yes, in many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play a game at all because the player quits playing the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. Do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being performed or not based on the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entrance is accepted. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing variable display based on the drawing of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. By the number of the holding symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the number of holding balls on which the variable display is currently held. In the present embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be able to be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is configured not to be stored. For this reason, in the sub display area Ds, only the number of holding symbols corresponding to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is displayed.

  In addition, on the display screen shown using FIG. 4A, the sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the dynamic display (variation display) of the third symbol in the main display area Dm 4 (a) (a variation effect) is performed to display a notice effect, a character, the number of holding balls, etc. in the sub display area Ds, but all the game states are shown in FIG. 4 (a). It is not necessary to form each area shown in, and for example, when making the player pay attention to an effect for suggesting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds It may be configured to perform powerful rendering by reducing (erasing) and expanding the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when an effect of changing the display mode of the holding symbol or game guidance for explaining future game contents is emphasized in the sub display area Ds and executed, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced to By expanding the display area of the display area Ds, an effect that is easy for the player to understand may be performed.

  Furthermore, an area for displaying the number of holding symbols in the main display area Dm or an area for executing a notice effect may be formed according to the set gaming state and the effect mode being executed. An area for executing the variable display of the third symbol may be provided in the display area Ds.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4B, an example of the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, three parts of the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed on the right and left sides of the display area Dm. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state. Furthermore, in the upper center portion of the main display area Dm, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. In this small area Dm1, the variable display of the three third symbols of the simple aspect composed only of the numerals “1” to “9” is executed. In the small area Dm1, the jackpot is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols configured by the same number. It should be noted that the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simple manner as compared to the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. The first special symbol lottery is executed, and the second special symbol lottery has almost no opportunity to be executed.

  Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by setting it as the structure which displays the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol mainly performed in a bigger display area. In the following description, the variable display of the special symbol mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state or probability change state, the variable display of the first special symbol corresponds) is referred to as the main fluctuation, in each gaming state The variation display of the special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular game method is performed (the variation display of the second special symbol corresponds to the normal condition or the probability change condition) is referred to as a secondary variation.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, when winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, a long period (up to 10 minutes) The variable display (dynamic display) is executed, and the gaming state is configured to shift from the probability change state to the latent state at the timing when the variable display is started. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (period from when the fluctuation display to the big hit is executed to the end of the fluctuation display, to the start of the jackpot game), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. The game is configured to execute a game aiming at a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation, and the variation display of the first special symbol is the sub variation.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, the holding symbols imitating the face of a bird are displayed in the same number as the number of holding balls in the first symbol. At this time, at the start of the variable display based on the holding ball corresponding to each of the reserved symbols, an effect of entering into the interior of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 is executed. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the holding ball has been started. Also, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is performed by the holding symbol sometimes performing a special operation, another character appearing, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). Moreover, you may comprise so that the ball entering to the 2nd ball entrance 640 can be hold | maintained. In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation display effect executed corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the fluctuation state of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is a variable display (dynamic display) for showing a lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display for showing a lottery result of the second special symbol And) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  And, when the variation display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed in the state where the definite variation state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol Is shifted to the low probability state, and the gaming state is configured to shift from the probability change state to the latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so many lottery of the second special symbol may be executed. It is a possible period (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol at a probability of about 1/2, during the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, the small hit When the player wins the game, the small hit game to be executed is executed frequently, and a game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) advantageous to the player who can obtain many winning balls is achieved.

  As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol winning the jackpot in the probability change state Since it is (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), when special figure 2 advantageous state ends, big hit game will be executed. As described above, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol (special figure 2) and a small hitting game is executed, the variation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period Interrupt the measurement of the), when the small hitting game is over, it is configured to resume the measurement of the suspended display period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hitting game, so regardless of the number of small hitting games executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period. The player can be provided with a certain special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) in the movement is a stop display mode showing the detachment. It is configured to stop by force. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is made different according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit (a lottery result capable of giving the first benefit to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is that the lottery result is out of order. If the stop display is in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small hit (a lottery result capable of giving the player a second benefit different from the first benefit), the variation of the other special symbol Is suspended until the end of the second benefit award (until the small hit game is ended), and is resumed after the end of the second benefit award. In addition, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is out, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the lottery contents of the other special symbol (the period until the lottery result is displayed, the period until the lottery result is displayed) based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols. A variety of gameplay can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a lottery result capable of giving a bonus to the player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is made different according to the content of the bonus. Therefore, for example, in the case where the lottery result gives the player the most advantageous benefit (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result giving the benefit. Even if the player is forced to stop the change so that the lottery result deviates, the player is prevented from being given an extra benefit, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the jackpot game In the case of, in order to prevent the bonus based on the lottery of the other special symbol being given during the small hitting game, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed, the fluctuation table It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in the state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are simultaneously changing, the player is given the most inconvenient benefit by being granted the most advantageous benefit to be awarded later. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player does not get out of the game and to prevent a situation in which a player feels uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short display period (0.5 seconds) is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), The small hit game is configured to be able to be executed frequently. Then, the condition that the latent state is set as the gaming state, the condition that the latent state is ended as the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the first special symbol Since the stop display is in the display mode indicating the big hit and the big hit game is executed, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantage period which is advantageous to the player who is frequently played the small hit game. The second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to play the game with enthusiasm so that the first advantageous period is set.

  Next, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot gaming state is set as the gaming state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the contents of the jackpot game, for example, the round of the jackpot game currently being executed. The number of rounds display mode to show the number, the acquired amount display mode to show the number of acquired balls, the type to suggest the type of jackpot game in progress (the number of rounds, the gaming state set after the jackpot game is over) Suggested display mode, the number of jackpots won during the period when the non-normal state (probability change state, latent state, time saving state) is set without setting the normal state as gaming state continuously (so-called, the number of consecutive chans The jackpot game display mode in which the etc. is displayed is displayed.

  And, at the timing when the big hit game is over (see Figure 5 (a)), if the big hit type of this time is the big hit type (for example, big hit A) that sets the probability change state as the gaming state after the big hit game is over, As shown in FIG. 6 (a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) is displayed which aims to set a latent state advantageous to the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display content of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic view schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6A, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment of "chance zone rush !!" indicating that a definite change state is set after the jackpot game is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 displayed during a period in which a probability change state or a latent state is set is displayed. The character 811 is configured so as not to appear (is not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is required to display the period during which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The game state that is advantageous to the game state (a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

  With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen. Can be provided.

  In addition, a comment of “Aim for RUSH !!” for aiming to set the latent state in the main display area Dm is displayed. Furthermore, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the characters "left strike" are displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to play the left strike game. This makes it possible to easily grasp that the player plays the left side game aiming at the left side area when the probability change state is set. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, which is operated to open during the big hit game, is a ball fired in the left-handed game (a ball which has flowed down the left area) and a ball fired in the right-handed game. The characters ("left hit", "right hit") displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, which are disposed at positions where they can win (downstream position in the game area (see FIG. 2)) The game method for guiding during the jackpot game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the jackpot game is executed.

  Specifically, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and it is determined that the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability changing state) in which the left hitting game is guided, as a guidance display during the big hit If "left-handed" is displayed and it is determined that the game state (latency state) in which the right-handed game is guided is determined, "right-handed" is displayed as a guidance display during the big hit. As a result, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the trouble of changing the game method for the player.

  In addition, the special display 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third design corresponding to the first special symbol in the main display area Dm, and the special figure 2 display area for displaying the third design corresponding to the second special symbol Dm 2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, “777” is displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm 1 as a display mode corresponding to a jackpot game currently being executed (during an ending screen display). It is displayed. In addition, "-" is displayed on the special figure 2 display area Dm2 as a non-variation display mode which shows that the 2nd special symbol is not fluctuatingly displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the non-variation display mode described above is displayed when the special symbol has not been variably displayed even after the power is turned on. By displaying this non-variation display mode, it is possible to make the player predict the past game history (the change history of the special symbol).

  In the present embodiment, the non-variable display mode described above is configured to be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating detachment is configured to be displayed. Display is also displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1 and the special view 2 display area Dm2 when it is determined that the elapsed period since the previous variable display was performed has exceeded a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) The aspect may be configured to be variably displayed in the initial display mode and the non-variable display mode.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In the state where the probability change state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5 (b)), it becomes a game state in which it is easy to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by the left strike game. That is, since the high probability state of the symbol is normally set in the positive change state, the electric character 64a is easily released, and the ball is easily inserted into the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

  The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the definite variation state will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a schematic view schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the positive variation state. As shown in FIG. 6 (b), a comment of "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is a definite change state is displayed to scroll in the lateral direction (right to left) in the sub display area Ds. Ru.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect of moving (running) the character 811 in the lateral direction (left to right) is displayed. Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1. In addition, also at this time, since the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6 (a) (because the ball is not entered into the second ball entry port 640 by the right-handed game) The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of motion display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the definite variation state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol in the definite variation state (decision judgment result) Accordingly, the operation display pattern of the character 811 is configured to be different. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is won in the jackpot during the definite change state.

  After the display screen shown in FIG. 6 (b) is displayed, the display shown in FIG. 7 (a) is performed when the variable display is executed to show that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the big hit. The screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic view showing the display content displayed when the variable display in which the jackpot is won is started during the probability change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state transitions from the probability changing state to the latent state at the timing when the variable display indicating that the first special symbol is won in the big hit during the probability changing state is started. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, since the game state shifts to the advantageous state (latency state) for the player at the timing when the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the first special symbol in the special view 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode (the display mode of "333") of the effect pattern 813 for showing that the gaming state has shifted to the player is the stop display Be done. As a result, it is possible for the player to think that the gaming state has shifted from the probable change state to the latent state by the stop display of the effect pattern 813. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the effect symbol display mode stopped and displayed is a display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be considered as an aspect.

  The present embodiment is configured such that it is possible to execute many small hitting games by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the latent state is set. Therefore, at least, during the period in which the latent state is set, “right-handed” for indicating the right-handed game to the player is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of “RUSH rush !! Please hit right” is displayed to indicate that the latent state has been set as the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of variation of the first special symbol winning the big win, the production symbol displayed in the main display region Dm is stopped and displayed without changing the presentation mode of the special figure 1 display region Dm1. Since the game is configured as described above, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has shifted according to the lottery result of the presentation symbols.

  And, during the latent state where the right-handed game is being executed continuously (during the big hit of the first special symbol), if you win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery shown in Figure 7 (b) As shown in the figure, an effect mode is displayed to indicate that the player has won the small hit. Here, the display contents in the case where the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). FIG. 7B is a schematic view schematically showing display contents of the display screen in the latent state.

  According to FIG. 7 (b), in the state in which the latent state is set (during RUSH), the first special symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 when the small winning of the second special symbol lottery is won. Is displayed to indicate that it is in the middle of fluctuation (during jackpot fluctuation), a display mode "341" indicating that the player wins a small hit is displayed in the special view 2 display area Dm2. .

  Then, the treasure box 812 displayed as an effect mode in RUSH is opened, and "V" for showing a small hit is displayed as an effect pattern 813 for showing the game result from the inside. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the player can win the small hit with the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, which is pivoted when the player wins a small hit, is provided in the right area, and a game can be performed with the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, even if the small hitting game is frequently executed during the latent state, it is sufficient for the player to continue the right-handed game, thus providing the player with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability change state, the latent state is set from the time of the jackpot fluctuation start, and the latency state In the state where is set, it is comprised so that the lottery of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) can be performed efficiently.

  Therefore, it is configured to notify the player of the period in which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is also the second in a state where the positive variation state is set. Both special symbols may change.

  In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) has been set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), The lottery of the second special symbol in the latent condition can not be executed until the special symbol stops fluctuating, and a problem occurs that the small hit game is not executed regardless of how long it is in the RUSH condition. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the fluctuation state of the second special symbol (presence or absence of fluctuation, The remaining fluctuation period is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is configured to be different.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5 and FIG. 8, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the definite change state), the second special symbol ( The contents of the effect when the special figure 2) is fluctuating will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state in which the probability variation state is set, if the second special symbol is in motion (see (c) in FIG. 5), the probability variation A "super-chance zone" is displayed with an increased expectation for the RUSH state to be set, rather than the "chance zone" for indicating the state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8A, the display contents of the display screen in the "super chance zone" will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram showing the case where the variation winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol variation in the positive variation state. That is, this "super chance zone" is a state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, but the variation display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is a display mode which shows the state which is not complete | finished.

  When the "super-chance zone" is set, a comment indicating that the "super-chance zone is in progress" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. The character 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm in a mode in which the character 811 is moving at a higher speed than in FIG. 6B, and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 812.

  And "variation display mode" for showing that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and the latent state is set in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The "variation display mode" during fluctuation from the point before time is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8A is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 variation executed across the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probability change state to the latent state ends. When the special figure 2 fluctuation ends (see FIG. 5D), a “RUSH” rush screen is displayed to notify the player that the player has entered “RUSH” (see FIG. 8B).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8 (b), the contents of the screen that has entered the "RUSH" via the "super chance zone" will be described. FIG. 8 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, a display pattern 813 is displayed from the inside of the treasure box 812 and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has rushed to "RUSH" is displayed. Then, “right-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the gaming method in the rush game. At this point in time, a special display pattern Dm1 displays a variation display mode to indicate that the first special symbol is fluctuating (during jackpot fluctuation), and the special figure 2 display region Dm2 indicates a deviation. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. During the rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the jackpot change of the first special symbol, the game of causing the lottery of the second special symbol to be frequently performed by setting the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is short by performing the right-handed game Is executed. In addition, although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the state where the jackpot is won by one special symbol (including during the jackpot variation), the jackpot is won in the lottery of the other special symbol It is configured not to. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small hit or a drop. And in the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

  Therefore, during the rush game, the player wins a small hit with a probability of 1/2, and the game for obtaining a winning ball by the small hit game continues until the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is finished. That is, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot variation period of the first special symbol is fully used since the jackpot is not won by the lottery of the second special symbol. Rush game can be provided.

  Then, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is finished (see FIG. 5 (f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type selected this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b)). Here, with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, the display screen at the end of the rush game (at the stop of the special hit of the big hit variation) will be described.

  FIG. 9 (a) is a view schematically showing the display contents in the case where the jackpot (jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a)) which is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. Is a diagram schematically showing display contents in the case of winning a jackpot (jackpot D (see FIG. 16A)) which is disadvantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), at the timing when the third symbol ("777") for showing that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a)) is won is displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1, In the special view 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol "346" indicating disengaging is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, the effect pattern 813 ("super V") indicating that the player has won the jackpot advantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812 and a comment of "congratulations" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this case, in the guidance display area Dm3, the characters “right strike”, which is a game method similar to that in the latent state, are displayed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9B, at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) is won is displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1, In the special view 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol "346" indicating disengaging is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a representation pattern 813 ("END?") Indicating that the player has won the jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812 and a comment of "Please return to the left" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Be done. In this case, in order to indicate to the player that the rush game is over, the character “left strike”, which is a game method similar to that in the normal state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

  9B shows the display screen in the case of winning the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A), but in the case of winning the jackpot C (see FIG. 16A), that is, the jackpot D The same jackpot game is executed, but the same display screen is displayed also when the gaming state set after the jackpot is won by the jackpot which becomes more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D, and the jackpot is recovered at the end of the jackpot game As the effect, it is configured to execute the effect of performing the right-handed game. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgetting reminder screen displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (value medium) into a card unit installed accompanying the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for gaming. In such a pachinko machine 10, when the player has won many balls by playing a game, a situation occurs in which the card is forgotten to be inserted in the card unit and the card is forgotten at the end of the game. I had something to do.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting reminder screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of a jackpot game where a winning ball can be acquired). This can prevent the player from forgetting to take the card. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that is easy to acquire a prize ball as a jackpot game and a jackpot that is hard to win a prize ball, and furthermore, it is possible to set a gaming state in which a small hitting game can be executed frequently in a short time The timing at which the card forgetting alert screen is displayed can be set in accordance with the game result (accumulation of the number of winning balls in a predetermined period).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10A, the display contents of the card forgetting alert screen will be described. FIG. 10A is a schematic view schematically showing the display contents of the card forgetting alert screen. Thus, while displaying the operation at the time of taking out the card from the card unit using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, a comment of "Please be careful to forget the card" is displayed .

  Next, the display timing of the card forgetting alert screen will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIG. 10 (b), the first jackpot is "jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a))", that is, in the case of winning a jackpot capable of giving many prize balls to the player in one jackpot game. It is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting alert display), and the first jackpot is “big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))” in FIG. 10 (c) and FIG. 10 (d). That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting alert display) when winning a jackpot capable of giving many winning balls to the player in one jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), when the first jackpot (the jackpot won when the normal state is set as the gaming state) is the jackpot A, the number of winning balls is sufficient during the jackpot. In order to give, the card display is executed in the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), when the first jackpot is a jackpot C, the player can not give a sufficient number of winning balls during the jackpot. The card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first jackpot (jackpot C) because there is a possibility of continuing to borrow a ball using the card.

  In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first jackpot to the setting of the normal state is defined as an advantageous duration, and the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous duration is accumulated, and the cumulative result is The card display is configured to be executed with the card display execution condition having reached a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots).

  That is, when a small hit game occurs continuously after the big hit C ends, and the number of prize balls in the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card display is performed on the small hit game ending screen. (Refer to FIG. 10 (c)), when jackpot C is repeatedly executed and the number of prize balls in the advantage continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card display is performed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See FIG. 10 (d)).

<About the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic view schematically showing a method of transitioning from one gaming state to another gaming state for the four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

  First, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the left because the player who played the game with the left hit tends to have a higher lottery frequency of the special symbol than playing the game with the right. This is because it is easy to enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1 when the player strikes the left. In addition, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, as described above, the small hit is not drawn, so the ball is endless unless it is a big hit. It is in a disadvantageous condition that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when the jackpot occurs. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. The details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, if it becomes jackpots A and C determined by a ratio of 65% in total when it becomes a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot end, the center of FIG. It shifts to the definite change state ST2 shown in FIG. In addition, when it becomes the big hit D which is decided with ratio of 10% when it becomes the big hit with the drawing of the first special symbol in normal state ST1, after the big hit end, it moves to time saving state ST3 which is shown on the right side of Figure 11 . On the other hand, when it becomes the jackpot B determined at a rate of 25% when it becomes the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the jackpot end (loop the normal state To do).

  In the normal state, it is usual to play a game by aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by hitting left, but the player intentionally strikes right and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, a part of the ball that has made a left strike may enter the second entrance port 640, and as a result, it may become a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, there are three types of big hit types (big hit E to G) as big hit types set when the big win is won with the second special symbol, and in the normal state was won the big hit of the second special symbol In the case of jackpot E, F determined in the proportion of 65% in total, transition to the definite change state ST 2 after the jackpot end, when it is the jackpot G determined in the proportion of 35%, the normal state as gaming state after jackpot end Is set again (loop normal state).

  In this way, when it becomes a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, while there is a possibility of transitioning to a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a ratio of 10% (big hit D), When it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes 0. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing the unusual game method which performs the lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be enlarged by performing the right strike in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game. In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, because it is configured to set a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of a long time (10 minutes), when the gaming efficiency is to play a left-handed game As compared with the above, it is possible to further increase the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by performing the right strike in the normal state.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the definite change state will be described. As described above, in the definite change state, it is easier for the player to hit the left because it is easier for the player to play the game with the left hit than to play the game with the right hit as in the normal state. It becomes. In the positive change state, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state, it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but is disadvantageous compared to the latent state. When the definite change state ST2 is set, the state shifts to the latent state SP1 when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won (special figure 1 jackpot variation starts).

  In the definite change state, while aiming at the upper first ball entry port 64b1 by hitting left similarly to the normal state, the game is aimed at the lower first ball inlet 64b2 provided below the upper first ball port 64b1. It will be done. That is, since the high probability state of the symbol is normally set during the definite change state, the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, it becomes a gaming state where it becomes easier to execute the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

  In such a definite variation state, the left hitting game is usually performed to make a drawing of the first special symbol, but the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 and the second special symbol There is also a possibility of winning a jackpot by lottery. In this case, when the jackpot E, F is determined at a rate of 65% in total when winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, the probability change state ST2 is set again after the jackpot end, and determined at a rate of 35% When the jackpot becomes G, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

  That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the definite variation state, it is possible to shift to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player, while the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. In this case, the possibility of shifting to the latent state becomes zero. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method for executing the lottery of the second special symbol can be increased by performing the right strike in the definite change state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent state, unlike the normal state or the definite change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, so by playing the game with the right hand, the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right than to hit the left.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the probability change state is set (first transition condition), the jackpot C is won in the state where the probability change state and the time saving state are set. There are two transition conditions (the second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is established, the latent state is in progress before the jackpot game is started, ie, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol. When the second transition condition is established, the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the gaming state (latency state) that is most advantageous to the player can be set can be made before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can play various games. Can provide sex.

  Furthermore, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent state is set is the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so the period in which the latent state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create the effect to be performed during the latent state in advance (when the latent state is set) in accordance with the period in which the latent state is set.

  In addition, when the jackpot C is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability change state is set, the player can be set to the latent state either before or after the jackpot game. It is possible to provide unexpected playability.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate 65f of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the variable winning device 65 A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the right as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands for these via the input / output port 205. Send control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21. FIG. First, details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  In main controller 110, main processes of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display result in second symbol display device (not shown) Run. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device. used.

  Selection of jackpot random number counter C1 to be used for lottery of jackpot (and jackpot) and selection of jackpot type (jackpot symbol) for setting of display of jackpot lottery and first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In addition, the small hitting type counter C5 is used for the selection of the small hitting type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 52) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for entering a ball into the first entrance 64 and each counter for entering a ball in the second entrance 640 is stored in the RAM 203. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which a value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with a maximum of four holding balls. Therefore, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol such as when the jackpot of the special symbol is not being played, each counter value is When the ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the ball enters the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic Various settings and control processing for display are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for fluctuating display of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, during a period when the first special symbol can not be drawn, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entry slot 64, And when the number of holding balls of the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Be done. In addition, when the number of holdings for the first ball entrance 64 is the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment) or more, acquisition of each counter value and the like is not performed, but four balls (four in the present embodiment) Only the winning balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. In addition, the ball entered the second entrance slot 640 during a time when lottery of the second special symbol such as during the second special symbol variation display or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is impossible. In this case, only the winning balls (two winning balls in the present embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring the counter values and the like.

  In the present embodiment, although the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is four for the first entrance 64, it is not limited thereto, and may be less than four (for example, three). There may be more than four (eg, eight). Further, the upper limit value may not be provided. Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which does not hold | throw-in to the ball to 2nd ball entrance 640 (the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the 2nd special symbol), holding storage is possible similarly to the 1st ball entrance 64 It may be configured.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 479). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is specified in the first random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the first random number counter C1 When the value matches with the value of the jackpot random number defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the value of the random number which is the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202 b (refer to FIG. 15 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a). The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), in the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “7, 8” is determined, and if it is any of “7, 8”, it is determined that a big hit is made.

  In addition, when it is a high probability state of the special symbol (probability state, latent state) as a game state, the value of the 1st random number counter C1 which is acquired in the drawing of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol It is determined whether it is in the range of “0 to 5”, and if it is in the range of “0 to 5”, it is determined that it is a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the random number counters having a total number of 480, since the low probability state of the special symbol defines two values as the value to be determined as the big hit, the low probability state of the special symbol The jackpot probability at time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/80.

  Next, the small hitting random number table 202 b will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), a random number to be a small winning is not defined in the first special symbol lottery. That is, it does not become a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432", the range of "212 to 432" If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of the small hit of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first random number counter C1 per jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "7, 8" are the first per one as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Thus, since the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 2 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 per jackpot of the special symbol, and the random number "0 to 5" is the first random number table as described above It is stored in 202a. As described above, since the total number of random number values to be a big hit is six while the total number of random number values is 480, the probability to be a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/80".

  Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 that will be small per win in the lottery of the second special symbol, the random value "212-432" is stored in the small per random number table 202b ing. As described above, since the total number of random numbers to be small hits is 221 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability to become a small symbol of a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The value of the first collision type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). It becomes. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the small hitting, small hitting classification (small hitting A) on the basis of the value of this small hitting classification counter and the small hitting classification selection table 202e (figure 16 (b) reference) ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In the variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the gaming state are set, and for each, variation pattern selection tables are set for each of the pass / fail determination results. The details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 232, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the second embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal start opening (through gate) 67. Acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is specified in the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 15 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the second specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, there are 11 random values for the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol (during the normal state and the latent state) as the gaming state, and the range is “0 to 10 It is ". Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 11 among the total of 233 random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is "11/233".

  On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (probable variation state, time-shortening state), there are 232 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “0 to 231”. Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 232 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is “232/233”. As described above, in this embodiment, the random number value corresponding to the normal symbol is configured such that a difference of about 20 times is provided between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol There is. In addition, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 when the normal symbol is hit is also high for the normal symbol against the low probability state of the normal symbol The probability state is more advantageous (it is easier for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64b2).

  When the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds in the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished After that, a symbol “o” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b 2 is opened for “one second × two times”. On the other hand, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "0 to 231" in the high probability state of the normal symbol, it is determined to be hit, and the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished. After that, a symbol “o” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b 2 is opened for “one second × two times”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normal electric character combination may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the game characteristics.

  The common variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter which is incremented by one in order in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal design based on the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 (see FIG. 20) ) Are defined in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. The details of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the present embodiment. In addition to the first random number table 202a, the small random number table 202b, and the second random number table 202c described above, the ROM 202 further includes a large hit type selection table 202d, a small hit type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection. At least a table 202f and a common drawing variation pattern table 202g are provided.

  First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is , It has been defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning combination is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". Are defined. In this "big hit A", the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and a big hit game in which the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is opened is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit A" is 25, so "big hit A" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 25% (25/100).

  Then, when "big hit A" is selected, the positive change state is set at the end of the big hit (positive change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state when winning the big hit, and 10000 times are reduced It is set (a value of 10000 is set to the time reduction counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit A" ends, a definite change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  Since "big hit A" is one of the highest hit types with the highest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the collision probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which an advantageous game can be performed more than the ordinary state is obtained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent condition is more likely to give an advantage to the player than the definite variation state, and among the plurality of gaming conditions, the next to the latent condition is provided. It is a game state advantageous to

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 49", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is the same jackpot game as the "big hit A" described above is executed, the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the jackpot to open the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) A game is set. After the "big hit B" ends, the probability change flag 203g is set to be off, and the time reduction counter 203f is configured to have a different value according to the game state at the time of winning.

  If the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is a normal state, the value of "0" is set to the time reduction counter 203f, and if the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is a time saving state or a probability change state, A value of "100" is set. That is, when the player wins the "big hit B" with the normal status set, the normal status is set after the big hit ends, but when the "big hit B" is won during the time saving status After the big hit, the time saving state (100 times) is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit B" is 25, so "big hit B" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 25% (25/100).

  "Big jack B" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds like "Big jack A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but a high probability state of special symbol is not set after the jackpot end , "Jackpot A" is a disadvantage jackpot type.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 89”, “big hit C” is defined in association with it. In this "big hit C", the number of rounds is 2 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, even in the small hitting game executed when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened In this configuration, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case of winning the "big hit C" and the case of winning the "small hit".

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the big hit game or the small hit game was performed when the first attacker is released and the hit game is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the player is configured to be in the latent state (RUSH state) in which the small hitting game can be executed frequently during the big hit fluctuation period of the first special symbol, the player 1Attack is released and it will be played while expecting that the game is a small hit game. That is, by providing a game period in which the player does not normally want a situation in which the jackpot game desired by the player is most desired to be executed, novel game characteristics can be provided.

  After the "big hit C" ends, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, and a different value is set to the time reduction counter 203f in accordance with the gaming state at the time of winning. If the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is a normal state, a value of “10000” is set to the time reduction counter 203f, and if the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is a time saving state or a probability change state, A value of "0" is set. That is, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, the definite change state is set after the end of the jackpot, but the jackpot is won in the positive change state or the short time state. In this case, the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot.

  In this way, in the gaming state when the jackpot is won, even if it is the jackpot of the same type, by configuring the gaming state to be set after the jackpot is different, the player simply aims to win the jackpot Not only that, but also because it is possible to focus on the set gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is configured to be most advantageous to the player, and the probability change state is set as the condition under which the latent state is set. There are two conditions of the first setting condition where jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol is started in the state where is set, and the second setting condition of winning jackpot C in the state where the definite change state and the time saving state are set. doing. That is, according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the degree of expectation (probability) for which the latent state is set is configured to be different. By configuring in this manner, the player is allowed to gradually increase the expectation for setting a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (in accordance with the set gaming state) according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value which is "big hit C" is 40, so "big hit C" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 40% (40/100). Since "big hit C" is one of the big hit types that has a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than "big hit A" and "big hit B" described above, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained However, depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot, it is set after the jackpot because it is the only jackpot type that can set the latent state that is most advantageous to the player as the gaming state set after the jackpot ends. In terms of gaming state, the jackpot type is more advantageous than "jackpot A", "jackpot B".

  In the range of “90 to 99”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit D”. In this "big hit D", the number of rounds is 2 rounds, and a big hit game (the same as "big hit C") for opening the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is set.

  After the end of the "big hit D", the probability change flag 203g is set to off, and the value of "0" is set to the time saving counter 203f. That is, when the "big hit C" is won, the normal state is set after the big hit ends. Since this "big hit D" is the same big hit game content as the "big hit C" described above, the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small hit game ing.

  After completion of the "big hit D", as it is configured to set the normal state as described above, the variable display (big hit fluctuation) won in "big hit D" in the state where the positive change state is set If executed, after frequently playing a small hit game during the big hit fluctuation, the big hit game is performed, and then the normal state is set.

  That is, in the latent state (RUSH state) when winning a "big hit D" in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state after the "big hit D" where the opening operation same as the small hit game is set is finished Since it is set, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state in which the jackpot game is to be executed has ended.

  Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value which is the "big hit D" is 10, so the "big hit D" is determined when it becomes the big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 10% (10/100). The "big hit D" is one of the big hit types that has a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the "big hit A" and "big hit B" described above, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained It becomes. Then, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot, since the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot, it is also disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment has four jackpot types ("jackpot A" to "jackpot D") as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). There is. Among them, in the two jackpot types ("big hit A", "big hit B"), to perform a big hit game open target second attacker (second variable winning device 650) that is open only during the big hit game, In the other two jackpot types ("big hit C", "big hit D"), the jackpot game is executed targeting the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the small hit game.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the main jackpot game ("big hit A", "big hit B") intended to cause the player to obtain a winning ball as a big hit of the special symbol, and changing the gaming state A secondary jackpot game ("big hit C") aimed at making it difficult to tell whether the player has won the big hit or not (it is difficult to determine whether the small hit game is a big hit game) It is configured to be able to execute "big hit D").

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is not a jackpot game but a game characteristic that allows a player to obtain a prize ball by a small hit game, so it is set difficult to obtain a large number of prize balls during a jackpot game As a jackpot (even if a jackpot game is executed with only a small number of balls depending on the jackpot type), a jackpot game aimed to vary the gaming state while suppressing giving the player a sense of discomfort It can be set.

  On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by lottery of the second special symbol, "jackpot E" is defined in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 4". In this "big hit E", the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and a big hit game in which the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is opened is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 5 counter values that will be "big hit E", so "big hit E" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery Rate is 5% (5/100).

  Then, when "big hit E" is selected, the positive change state is set at the end of the big hit (positive change flag 203g is set on) regardless of the gaming state when winning the big hit, and 10000 times It is set (a value of 10000 is set to the time reduction counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit E" ends, a definite change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  The "big hit E" is one of the types of jackpots with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the collision probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which an advantageous game can be performed more than the ordinary state is obtained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent condition is more likely to give an advantage to the player than the definite variation state, and among the plurality of gaming conditions, the next to the latent condition is provided. It is a game state advantageous to

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 64", "big hit F" is associated and defined. In this "big hit F", the number of rounds is 2 rounds, and a big hit game in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit F" is 60, so "big hit F" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery Rate is 60% (60/100).

  Then, when "big hit F" is selected, the positive change state is set at the end of the big hit (positive change flag 203g is set on) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit (time change flag 203g is set on). It is set (a value of 10000 is set to the time reduction counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit F" is finished, a definite change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  The "big hit F" is one of the few types of jackpots with the smallest number of rounds, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the collision probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which an advantageous game can be performed more than the ordinary state is obtained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent condition is more likely to give an advantage to the player than the definite variation state, and among the plurality of gaming conditions, the next to the latent condition is provided. It is a game state advantageous to

  The "big hit G" is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99". In this "big hit G", the number of rounds is 2 rounds, and a big hit game in which the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is opened is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value which is "big hit G" is 35, so "big hit G" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery The ratio is 35% (35/100).

  Then, when "big hit G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to be off) regardless of the gaming state when winning a big hit, and the number of time saving times of 0 times is It is set (a value of 0 is set to the time reduction counter 203f).

  The "big hit G" is one of the types of jackpots with the smallest number of rounds, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the gaming state set after the big hit ends is a normal state, it is also disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the big hit. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery and the second jackpot in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery as described above. And the point that the percentage of setting the probability change flag 203g to ON after the big hit end is 65% (65/100), but the percentage where 15 rounds are set as the big hit game (special figure 1 is 50% , Special figure 2 5%), the percentage at which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is selected as the release target (50% special figure 1 and 5% special figure 2), gaming state at the time of jackpot winning The value of 10000 is set to the time reduction counter 203f after the big hit end in the case where the time reduction state is a probability change state (that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol) (special figure 1 is 25%, special figure 2 is 65%) Are configured differently.

  As described above, by making the jackpot gaming content and the gaming state after the jackpot end different according to the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot, it becomes possible to provide various game characteristics to the player, and the gaming It is possible to improve interest.

  In the present embodiment, although the above-described content is configured to be different according to the type of the special symbol, the present invention is not limited thereto, and even if only a part of the above-described content is configured to be different. Good, other than the above-mentioned contents, for example, by setting the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) where only the jackpot type corresponding to special figure 1 can be set, the number of rounds set may be different Alternatively, the ratio of setting the probability change flag 203g to on may be made different.

  In addition, on condition that the ball passes a specific area (for example, the area where the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is over In the gaming machine configured as described above, the probability that the ball passes through the specific area may be made different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special view 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special view 2. Further, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for indicating the lottery result in each gaming state set after the big hit may be configured to be different according to the big hit type.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, it is possible to win a prize in one round game for both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). The upper limit value is set to "10", but the upper limit value may be made different between the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit value of the opening operation in the round game may be made different depending on the winning jackpot type (or the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot).

  Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table to be referred to to determine the type of small hit when the small win occurs in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery. In the small hitting type selection table 202e, the corresponding small hitting type is defined for each range of the value of the small hitting type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), “small hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C 5 is “0 to 93”. This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only once for 1.5 seconds x 1 during the small hit game.

  Among the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, 94 small random numbers are "small hit A", so "small hit A" if the second special symbol draws a small hit, The rate at which is determined is 94% (94/100).

  Moreover, "small hit B" is matched and prescribed | regulated to the range whose value of small hit classification counter C5 is "94-98". The "small hit B" is a small hit type in which an open state of 0.2 seconds x 6 times is set during a small hit game. Among the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 5 random values that will be "small hit B", so "small hit B" if it becomes a small hit in the second special symbol The rate at which is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Furthermore, "small hit C" is specified in association with the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5. The "small hit C" is a small hit type in which the open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times is set during the small hit game. Among the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there is only one random value that will be "small hit C", so it will be "small hit C" if it becomes a small hit in the special symbol lottery The proportion is 1% (1/100).

  Next, details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f defines random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202f is a table 202f1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and for time reduction / probability variation for determining a variation pattern in a short time state or a positive change state. At least a table 202f2 and a latency table 202f3 for determining the fluctuation pattern in the latency state are included. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. In each table illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is described in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds in order to facilitate understanding.

  First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is normal. FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ordinary table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the table 202f1 for normal use is a random number value (variation type) for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each type of special symbol and each type of stop (special decision result) of the special symbol. The counter value of the counter value CS1 is specified.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls within the range of "0 to 50" and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “51 to 100”, super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “101 to 150”, and super reach for the range of “151 to 198” C (30 seconds) is associated.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is removed and the table for ordinary use 202f1 is referred to, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d) Accordingly, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the selected fluctuation pattern changes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 70”. A variation pattern of out (12 seconds) is associated, and out of the range of “71 to 150” is associated normal reach (20 seconds). Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “151 to 170”, and the super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 198”. It is done.

  On the other hand, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the fluctuation pattern of short deviation (8 seconds) corresponds to the range of "0 to 70" as the value of fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation pattern counter of long term (12 seconds) is associated with the range of “71 to 130” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the normal reach (20 seconds) is associated for the range of “131 to 170”. ing. Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 185”, and the super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “185 to 198”. It is done.

  In addition, the process (see S505 in FIG. 35) of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the table 202f1 for ordinary use is the process of subtracting the holding ball of the first special symbol (see S303 in FIG. 33) Is also performed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to in the state where there are four holding balls.

  As described above, when the number of holding balls is small (0 or 1), a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is easily selected as compared with the case where the number of holding balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this manner, when the number of holding balls is small, it is possible to secure a time for storing the holding balls and make it difficult for the fluctuation display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is large, it becomes difficult to store the holding by shortening the fluctuation time, so the ball number is further increased to the first ball entrance 64 when the number of holding balls becomes the upper limit (4). Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, out-of-long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right hitting is performed in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so the gaming efficiency is extremely deteriorated compared to the left hitting. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress anomalous gaming methods in which a right strike is performed at the normal time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, the details of the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 will be described. At this time, the short / probable change table 202f2 is a table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a high probability state (that is, a short time state or a positive change state) of a normal symbol is set as a gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the table 202f2 for short / prone variation is used to determine the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and for each type of stop (special decision result) of the special symbol. A random number value (counter value of variation type counter value CS1) is specified. The time reduction / probability change table 202f2 is different from the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18 and is configured such that a different variation pattern is not selected according to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. doing.

  That is, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is difficult to always secure the holding ball of the first special symbol, since it plays the game aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 while playing the left hitting game, There is a possibility that the period when the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol is not changed) may occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202 f 1 is configured such that a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be easily selected. Thereby, in the normal state, the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game.

  On the other hand, the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19 (a) is played in a left-handed game, and a game is performed in which a ball is inserted into the lower first entrance 64b2 It is a data table to be referred to. At this time, in the short state and the definite change state, since the electric accessory 64a is frequently opened, the gaming state in which the holding ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored is obtained.

  As described above, when the gaming state in which the holding balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, fluctuation occurs when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is small as in the above-described table 202f1 for normal The first special symbol (special figure 1) variation that is executed when the game is paused and the number of holding balls in the first special symbol decreases when a configuration in which a long variation pattern is easily selected is added. The fluctuation time of the game becomes longer, and it becomes difficult to play the game efficiently during the time saving state or the probability changing state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game state (short time state, positive change state) that can easily store the holding balls of the first special symbol, that is, the variation pattern table (time short · time reference referred in the high probability state of the normal symbol) In the table 202f2 for probability variation, the variation pattern selected by the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is not different (if the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is small, the variation pattern with a long variation time is not selected ) Is configured. Thereby, the game of a time saving state and a definite change state can be performed efficiently.

  Further, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state where the probability change state is set, the latency state starts from the probability change state at the timing when the jackpot variation starts. It is configured to migrate to Specifically, the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed in a state where the probability change state is set, and when the result of the selection (success or failure judgment result) is a big hit, the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 If you refer to, and a special variation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes latent while the special variation (600 seconds) is being executed, and the special variation ends, the special figure 1 The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the combination which shows that the lottery result of is a big hit, and a big hit game is started.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to simultaneously execute the lottery and the variable display, while the latent state is set (the special variation for the special figure 1) Of the second special symbol can be made) while In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation display period (variation time) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as the latent state only for a short period (one second), and only the second special symbol is specified. It is configured to win a small hit. By configuring in this manner, the player can frequently perform the lottery of the second special symbol while the latent state is set (while the hit special variation is being executed). You can get a lot of prize balls.

  As described above in FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability change state is set, 60 seconds to 600 are obtained depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. The variation time of the second is configured to be set, and this variation time directly becomes the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as a lottery result of a special symbol, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) as well as the result (incidence determination result) as to whether or not the jackpot is won. The interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (one minute) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, 2 If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, out-of-long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right hitting is performed in the time saving state or the definite changing state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set each time, so the gaming efficiency is extremely higher than the left hitting. Getting worse. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress anomalous game methods in which a right strike is performed in the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 (b), the details of the latency confirmation table 202f3 will be described. The latency confirmation table 202f3 is a table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the latency state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the latent table 202f3 is a random pattern for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each type of special symbol and the type of stop of the special symbol (appropriate determination result). A numerical value (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) is defined. In the same manner as the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 described above, the latent determination table 202f3 is configured such that a different variation pattern is not selected according to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol.

  This latent table 202f3 is used to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period when the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 is being executed during the definite variation state, or during the time saving state or the definite variation state In winning the jackpot which is the jackpot type of "jackpot C" in, when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed after the jackpot game is over Referenced.

  This latent confirmation table 202f3 is selected when the content specified in the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19A becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery The difference is that the value of the variation type counter CS1 defined for each variation pattern to be changed is different from the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the second special symbol lottery, Other than that is the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls within the range of "0 to 39" and the normal variation (60 (60) Seconds are associated, the range of "40 to 119" is associated with super fluctuation (180 seconds), and the range of "120 to 198" is associated with special variation (600 seconds).

  On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost and this latent confirmation table 202f3 is referred to, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d And the out-of-middle change (30 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1.

  When the second special symbol lottery is executed and the latency confirmation table 202f3 is referred to, one second is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the short-circuit fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, 2 If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, small hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the out-of-short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the change type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to execute many lots (variations) of the second special symbol during the latent state.

  Next, details of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g is a table to be referred to in order to select the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, in the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g, the range of values of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state at the time when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. And are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the normal state, the latent state, that is, the low probability state of the normal symbol, the entire range of possible values of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 A variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is associated with 0 to 198). Further, also in the case where the gaming state is the definite change state, the change pattern of the change time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the common drawing change type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a short time state, a definite change state, that is, a high probability state of a normal symbol, the value of the common drawing change type counter CS2 changes in the range of "0-198" and the change time changes by 3 seconds. Patterns are associated.

  In the first embodiment, although a plurality of variation pattern variations are provided only in the latent state, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is a normal state or a definite change state, a variation may be given to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, 2 seconds of 1 second or 3 seconds as the variation time The configuration may be such that one of the types is set. The variation time is not limited to two, and more variation times may be selected. As the variation time is varied, it is more difficult for the player to predict the variation time, so it is possible to make the right strike continuously more reliably during the latent state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the common drawing variation type counter CS2 acquired, but in addition to that, based on the number of holding balls of the normal symbol The variation time may be changed, the variation time may be changed based on the number of lottery times of the special symbol, or the variation time of the normal symbol may be set by a method combining the various configurations described above. Specifically, one second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol from the transition of the gaming state to the latent state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), and thereafter (for example, , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

  As described above, by measuring the number of times of special figure fluctuation (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) from the end of the previous big hit, and by configuring so that the fluctuation time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and executed During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, making the player play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation so that a more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, a short fluctuation time) is executed a lot. it can.

  In addition, while the lottery of the even numbered special symbols is executed after the gaming state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and other than that (odd number of times), It may be configured to set 3 seconds as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. As described above, by configuring the variation time of the normal symbol to be changed based on the number of times the lottery of the special symbol is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time, so that it is possible to more surely in the latent state. It is possible to make a right strike continuously. In this case, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the variation time of the normal symbol is longer (compared to the case where the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol It is good to constitute so that the fluctuation time of a normal symbol may become long, so that the number which carries out the reservation memory of the lottery is small.

  Moreover, when setting the fluctuation time of a normal symbol based on the holding ball number of a normal symbol, it is good to comprise so that long fluctuation time may be easy to be selected, so that the number of holding balls of a normal symbol is large. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of holding balls in the normal pattern is hard to be stored is adjusted, and the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of holding balls in the normal pattern is easily stored is per unit time The number of regular symbol lottery can be made uniform.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol holding ball Number counter 203e, time reduction counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, special figure 2 fluctuation Time counter 203n, large hitting middle flag 203o, small hitting middle flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, general drawing short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, At least other memory area 203z is included .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), each of which In the area, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area ~ Among the vacant areas in the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is the execution area After being shifted (moved), determinations such as drawing of special symbols are performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the second special symbol execution area 203b, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the determination value (counter value) for executing the lottery of the special symbol is stored. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, the respective counter values acquired at the timing when the start winning on the second entrance 640 is detected are stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, one execution area (normal symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) And. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the vacant area of), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserve first area to the execution area, the reserve first area becomes empty, so it is stored in another reserve area as well as the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a A shift process is performed to pack winning data into a reserve area with a smaller area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display of the special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) (the first symbol display device 37, It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and a maximum value of 4 each time the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Up to one is added (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47) See S1705). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110, the variable display being held by the main control unit 110 It is possible to obtain the value of the holding ball number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is the holding of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the command for holding ball number received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e holds the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to 4 times It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is set to zero, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of balls holding the variable display increases Every time, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S1805 in FIG. 48).

  When the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number M of suspension display of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes the 2-through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1903 in FIG. 49: See No).

  The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the remaining special symbol in the time saving state. At this time, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the short counter 203 f after the big hit ends. Then, the hour reduction counter 203f is decremented by one in the gaming state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 36). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the short time counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the time symbol of the normal symbol is short, and the determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the high probability table. . On the other hand, if the value of the hour reduction counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and the normal symbol determination is performed with reference to the low probability table.

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state when it is set to ON. That is, when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, the probability change status (special symbol: high probability status, normal symbol: high probability status) or the latent status (special symbol: high probability status) Normal symbol: Low probability state) is set.

  The probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot if the jackpot type won is a jackpot to set a probability change state or a latent state after the jackpot (S2402 in FIG. 54: Yes) 54 (see S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to be off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

  In this embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the big hit of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, without limitation thereto, for example, a special symbol from the time when the high probability state (special figure high probability state) of the special symbol is set as the special figure high probability end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol The probability variation flag 203g may be set to be off when the number of variations (the number of special pattern variations) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). In this case, in order to set the probability change flag 203g to OFF, the storage means for storing the number of times of special figure fluctuation as the special figure high certainty end condition in advance and the special figure high certainty state are set. A measurement means for measuring the number of times of special figure fluctuation, and an end judgment for judging whether the number of times of special figure fluctuation measured by the measurement means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations stored in the storage means (special figure high probability end condition) A means may be provided.

  Furthermore, a plurality of special figure high certainty end conditions are prepared, for example, special figure 1 high certainty end condition which can be established based only on the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol in the special figure high certainty state Various conditions such as the special figure 2 high probability end condition which can be established based only on the number of times, and the lottery end condition which can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, the lottery result of winning a small hit) It is also possible to configure the special figure high probability end condition to be easy, and to set the probability variation flag 203g to OFF when any of the special figure high probability end conditions is satisfied.

  Special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, when it is decided that the value of the 1st hitting random number counter C1 which is acquired on the basis of entering into the 1st entrance 64 matches with the big hit decision value at the time of the fluctuation start, it is turned on (See S407 in FIG. 34). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

  When the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends with the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h on, processing for forcibly stopping the second special symbol by the symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). . Thereby, it is possible to prevent a defect that the other becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of one big hit with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is turned on, when it is judged that the value of the 1st hitting random number counter C1 which is acquired on the basis of entering into the 2nd entrance 640, matches with the big hit decision value at the time of the fluctuation start, (See S1007 in FIG. 40). The special view 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

  When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends with the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i on, processing for forcibly stopping the first special symbol with a symbol is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). . Thereby, it is possible to prevent a defect that the other becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of one big hit with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The winning state storage area 203 j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is off), the winning state storage area 203j is in the normal state. “00H” is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a definite change state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, and the positive change flag 203g is on), the positive change state storage area 203j indicates a positive change state "01H" is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. "02H" is stored as information to indicate.

  The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot is ended (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

  The small hitting flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the second entrance 640 matches the small hitting determination value at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The small hit flag 203k is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). With this small hitting flag 203k on, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation display ends, temporarily stop the fluctuation of the other special symbol (subtract the counter that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol) A process of stopping is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). Thereby, during execution of the small hit of the second special symbol, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the problem that the big hit is started during the small hit will occur it can.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special When the variation pattern of the symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the counting results of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n.

  The jackpot middle flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in a jackpot. The jackpot flag 203o is set to ON when the start of the jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set off in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot.

  The small hit middle flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit middle flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if off, it indicates that the small hit is not in progress. The small hit middle flag 203p is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

  The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to win only the second special symbol in the small hit, and when the small hit is won (when the small hit flag 203 p is set to ON), 1) It is configured to interrupt the change display of the special symbol. In other words, among the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) of a plurality of types, it wins a small hit by lottery of one special symbol (second special symbol), and the small hit middle flag 203p is set on In this state, the variation display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) is not completed, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the small hit game. In addition, during the small hitting game, it is possible to prevent the other special symbol fluctuation display ending, and the big hit game being started.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203 s is a flag indicating that it is a period from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) with the stop symbol of the big hit to the start of the big hit. If this special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON, execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when there is a new ball entry to the second ball entrance 640 (See S901 in FIG. 39: Yes). This special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is removed and forced to stop with the symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and the processing for executing the second special symbol fluctuation display is avoided. If it has been set, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

  The common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is the short fluctuation (the fluctuation for 3 seconds), and is set to ON so that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is displayed. Symbol) is shown to have been executed. The common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t determines that the timing to set the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is during the time saving state (time in the short) (S1811 in FIG. 48: Yes 48. When the fluctuation time (short fluctuation) of 3 seconds is set, it is set to ON (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48) when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (the second symbol) is a hit (S1818 in FIG. 48: Yes).

  Here, when it is determined that the common drawing short change flag 203t is set to ON (S1819 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is in the time saving state (time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), When it is determined that the time saving state (during the time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48: Yes), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric role item 64a (FIG. 48 S1822). It is to be noted that the common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t is set to be off (S1820 in FIG. 48) after it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S106 in FIG. 48) is set to ON.

  As described above, the game state at the start of variation of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (at the setting of the variation time) and the setting condition of the electric character 64a after the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) has elapsed. Since the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the motorized prize 64a only when both the gaming state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of gaming states (normal state) By the fluctuation (lottery drawing) of the normal symbol executed across the time saving state, it is possible to reliably prevent the long opening of the electric character 64a from being opened long, and the advantage (long of the electric character 64a for the player) It is possible to prevent the player from being excessively provided open.

  The winning counter 203 u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) the first specified winning opening 65 a in the small hitting game round. When the value of the winning counter 203u is 10, which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In each round of the jackpot, even when the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, the round is ended if the round period set in the round is reached. The winning counter 203u is incremented by one each time a ball is inserted into the first specified winning opening 65a during a small winning round valid period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the above-mentioned winning counter 203u is not limited to small hitting games, but also when counting the number of balls that have won to the second specified winning opening 650a in each round in the big hitting game It is also used and is referred to when it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round (the number of winning prizes reaches 10) is established as in the small hitting game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the period for which the first specified winning opening 65a is opened as the game content of the small hitting game is 1.5 seconds, and the ending condition of the round established by the number of winnings is set to 10 pieces. doing. That is, the effective period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses until ten balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hitting game (until the round end condition for the winning number is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hitting game can be made constant, the effect across the small hitting game (period from the start of fluctuation of one special symbol to the end of fluctuation of another special symbol via the small hitting game The presentation period of a series of productions to be performed can be predetermined. Therefore, the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is the flag which shows the period which stops renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time of special figure 1, when it is set to on, renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time is stopped, When it is set to off from the state set to on, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) for which the lottery result is a small hit (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol variation process (figure) 32) (S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of the reference, when it is set to ON, processing is performed to update the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special view 1 in the same manner as during fluctuation (S203 in FIG. 32). That is, while the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. As a result, by setting the special view temporary stop flag 203v to ON, it can be informed that the fluctuation of the special view 1 is not forcibly stopped. Then, if it is determined that the first special symbol variation in progress processing (see FIG. 37) is set to on (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

  In the present embodiment, only the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to win a small hit, so the special symbol for which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on having won a small hit is the first special It becomes only a symbol, but if it is configured to be able to win a small hit also for the lottery of the first special symbol, even if the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is provided in order to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one of the special symbols is stopped in the combination showing the big hit (based on the big hit game being executed ), The process to forcibly stop the variation display of the other special symbol and stop, and when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small hit, the one special symbol is stopped by the combination showing a small hit On the basis of the above, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hitting game is over).

  That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, it is constituted so that change indication of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of one of the special symbols becomes the game result (for example, a big hit) that is most advantageous to the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, The special symbol (lottery result is a small hit) of is stopped and displayed, and it can be suppressed that a big hit is erased by a small hit.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. The basic function of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags, counters, and the like provided in the RAM 203.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 at least includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 roughly indicates the contents of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, out of range, etc.) ), And is used to determine the contents of the detailed variation display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol in the state where the probability change state is set, the fluctuation time is normal fluctuation or fluctuation per 60 seconds. A variation pattern command corresponding to one of the super variation per 180 seconds and the special variation per 600 seconds is output from main controller 110, and voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command (variation time Setting the fluctuation effect corresponding to the

  Here, as a variation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds execute the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) and the second in a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variation effect is set in which a stage performance mode (for example, production for defeating a second enemy) is executed, and a third stage performance mode (production for defeating a third enemy) is executed in a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds. The first 60 seconds perform the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) as the change effect corresponding to the change (180 seconds), and the second stage effect mode in a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds A change effect is set to execute (for example, an effect to be defeated by a second enemy), and as a change effect corresponding to a normal change (60 seconds), an effect mode of the first stage for the first 60 seconds (for example, the first enemy Destruction ) Change production to be executed is set to.

  In this way, the fluctuation pattern set for the player this time by setting the effect mode so as to put a break on the fluctuation effect to be executed corresponding to the stage of the fluctuation time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to enjoy the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type of image is, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when performing the fluctuation production mentioned above, the remaining time display mode for making a player grasp the remaining time with respect to the production period set as each step (for example, the timing at which the production mode may shift to the next step) It may be configured to display an effect mode in which the remaining time up to is counted down and displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player know in advance at least a period during which the variable effects are continuously executed (a period in which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with confidence. it can.

  In addition, a plurality of types of enemies appearing during the fluctuation production are provided, and depending on the type of the appearing enemy, the degree of expectation that the fluctuation production shifts to the next stage (proportion of selection of the production mode for winning the enemy), It is preferable to be able to indicate the content of the jackpot game to be executed after the end of the current variable display, and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is over.

  In addition, in this case, for example, when the enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is the hit super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type most advantageous to the player is It may be configured to indicate that it is selected, and if the variation pattern is a hit special variation (600 seconds), it indicates that the player is selected other than the most advantageous jackpot type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the effect mode (type of enemy) of the change effect by combining a plurality of elements that determine whether or not to give the player an advantageous benefit, so The effect can be further enhanced.

  In the stop display mode selection table 222b, a latent state is set as the gaming state, and a period (hereinafter referred to as a rush period) in which a small hitting game can be executed frequently is set by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table referred when selecting the stop display mode (refer to Drawing 7 (a) and Drawing 8 (b)) of the production design for informing a person. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured such that different stop display modes are selected according to the jackpot type won in the first special symbol lottery and the length of the rush period to be executed.

  Here, the content of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23A, in the stop display mode selection table 222b, the player predicts the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (the number of rounds and the game state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is defined that the stop display mode of the effect pattern is set to be possible.

  Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is elected to "jackpot A" which is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period If the information stored in the information storage area is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h falls within the range of "0 to 39". Stop display mode "111" is defined, stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99" .

  In addition, the jackpot is won, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within 300 seconds, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" and the stop display mode "333" is in the range of "40 to 79". Is defined, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "301 seconds-", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" of the value of the obtained effect counter 223h, "40 to 79" "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "777", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "VVV".

  Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the player wins "jackpot B" which is the jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, and the remaining time storage area 223p (stores information showing length of rush period If the information stored in the area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the stop display mode is within the range of "0 to 39" of the value of the obtained effect counter 223h. “222” is defined, the stop display mode “444” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”.

  In addition, the jackpot is won, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within 300 seconds, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" and the stop display mode "666" on the range of "40 to 79". Is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "301 seconds-", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" of the value of the effect counter 223h acquired, "40 to 79" "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "333", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "333".

  Lastly, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is elected as the "jackpot C" which is the second most advantageous jackpot type, or the "big hit D" which is the most disadvantageous jackpot type, If the information stored in the time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the acquired effect counter 223h The stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79" in the range of "80 to 99". The stop display mode "444" is defined.

  Also, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, it is elected as "big hit C" or "big hit D". When the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the obtained effect counter 223h, and in the range of "40 to 79", The stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is stored. If the information being displayed is "301 seconds-", that is, if the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the obtained effect counter 223h. , In the range of 40 to 99 ", it is defined stop display mode" 777 ".

  As described above, in this embodiment, the length of the rush period and the length of the rush period after the end of the rush period depending on the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period starts. The content of the jackpot to be executed (jackpot type) is configured to be suggested to the player. As a result, by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it is possible to make the player predict the future game contents.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the production symbol is defined to have a predetermined rule property. Specifically, the stop display mode of the production symbol is "even symbol", "odd symbol", It is specified that the benefits awarded to the player increase in the order of “777” and “VVV” (the rush period becomes longer, and the jackpot type becomes advantageous). As described above, by giving the stop display mode of the effect symbol a predetermined rule property, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  Further, since the stop display mode of the effect pattern is selected by combining the jackpot type and the length of the rush period, for example, the stop display mode "111" of the effect pattern is most advantageous for the player. Only when the jackpot type "big hit A" is set, it is specified that the rush period is selected even if it is within 60 seconds, so when "111" is displayed, the player In contrast to the novel game nature that it is desired that the rush period end in 60 seconds, that is, the game characteristic that normally requires a longer rush period, a combination of the jackpot type and the length of the rush period By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game characteristic for which a game result (short rush period) reverse to the normal is desired.

  In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the effect pattern, it indicates that the player is most selected as the most advantageous type for both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period. On the other hand, you can play with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the production symbol with reference to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the gaming state (the timing for displaying the production symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 stop) is displayed. It is configured to be different. Specifically, whether or not the second special symbol is in motion at the time when the latent state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability variation state is set), or not If it is determined that the second special symbol has not changed, that is, if it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol immediately after the latent state is set, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is It is configured to stop and display the effect pattern based on the start.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the latent state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability variation state is set), That is, unless it is not possible to execute the drawing of the second special symbol in the state where the latent state is set unless the variable display of the second special symbol currently being executed is ended, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed It is configured to stop and display the effect pattern based on the timing when the key is finished.

  By configuring in this manner, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in a state in which the latent state is set immediately after the rush period starts with the stopped display of the effect symbol, which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to play the game in the latent state without giving it.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the second special symbol fluctuates at the time when the latent state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability change state is set) When it is determined, the length of the rush period from the timing when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in execution is finished is determined, and if the result of the determination is within a predetermined time, the effect is made to stop and display the effect pattern It is configured not to execute (representation indicating that the rush period has been started). As a result, despite the fact that the effect pattern is stopped and displayed and the rush period has been started (the rush game has been started), if the small hitting game is to be executed, the rush period will end. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to display that the rush period (lash game) has been started by the effect symbol similar to the third symbol, so the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed. It can be made to seem as if rush game was performed based on the symbol being stopped and displayed. In addition, even when the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the rendering symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving the player a large sense of discomfort.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second special symbol being executed at the timing when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started or the timing when the latent state is set as the timing for stopping and displaying the effect symbol. Although the timing at which the variable display of symbols is stopped is used, the effect symbols may be stopped and displayed at timings other than this, and for example, they are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a If the winning information command indicating winning information is analyzed and it is determined in advance that the jackpot fluctuation is to be executed in the next fluctuation, immediately before the jackpot fluctuation is executed (the third symbol in the previous fluctuation of the jackpot fluctuation You may comprise so that a production | presentation pattern may be stopped and displayed by the timing by which it is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol immediately after the latent state is set.

  As described above, in the case of using a configuration in which the effect pattern is stopped and displayed before the jackpot variation is executed and the rush game is started to be started, the second on from the timing when the effect pattern is stopped and displayed. When a game aiming at the ball opening 640 (right-handed game) is performed, it is preferable that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the start of the next jackpot variation. Thereby, as a result of performing the right-handed game based on the stop display of the effect pattern, it is before the latent state is set (before the jackpot fluctuation is started), that is, while the probability change state is second It is possible to prevent a situation in which a lottery for a special symbol is executed and the period in which rush game is executed is shortened.

  In the additional effect selection table 222c, when selecting the effect mode (additional effect mode) at the time of resuming the variable display of the first special symbol temporarily stopped by having won a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol It is a data table to be referred to, and is configured such that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol after resumption. Here, the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (b).

  FIG. 23B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. As described above, the data content is defined, and the player predicts the remaining fluctuation time (the remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol by executing the additional rendering mode corresponding to the selected additional rendering type. Configured to earn.

  Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is “0 to 99 The additional effect type "none" is defined in the range of "," and the "additional effect A" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect A" is defined in the range of "," and the "additional effect B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". Then, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the acquired value of the additional effect counter 223i is in the range of “0 to 99”. An additional effect type “additional effect B” is defined, and “additional effect C” is defined in the range of “100 to 198”.

  Here, when the “addition effect A” is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to the display mode of the tattered. By grasping the display mode of the batter, the player can predict that the rush period is short. Further, when "addition effect B" is set, a treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) of the normal display mode is displayed, and when "addition effect C" is set, the normal display mode is selected. Also a gorgeous display mode is set. Further, when “none” is selected, an effect is set in which the treasure box 812 is not displayed during the remaining rush period.

  Although the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23B) shown in the present embodiment shows an example in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated with each other, the present invention is limited thereto. There is little probability that, for example, "additional effect C" is set in period B, or "additional effect A" or "none" is set in period C. Also good. In this way, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect on the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the stop display mode of the effect pattern displayed at the timing when the latent game becomes a latent state and the rush game is started, the composite game information in which the rush period and the jackpot type are combined is played The game is provided to the player and game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period is provided to the player by the additional effect during the rush period. As a result, the player can comprehensively determine the stop display mode of the effect pattern executed as the composite game information and the effect mode of the additional effect, thereby making it possible to predict more detailed game content.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22B, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, additional effect counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining short number area 223k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m, special drawing 2 Fluctuation time counter 223n, remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notified flag 223q, card notified flag 223s, rush displayed flag 223t, award ball number counter 223u, power supply At least the other memory area 223z It is provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning combination for the first ball entry port 64 is detected in the main control unit 110, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2, which are obtained according to the start winning combination. From the values of the small hit type counter C5 and the change type counter CS1, various information (hit or miss, big hit type in the case of a big hit, change pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed Various information predicted (estimated) in main controller 110 and the predicted various information is notified from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (the jackpot type in the case of a hit or a big hit, a fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information Are stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a fluctuation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended by the main control device 110 It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the change production of the 1st special symbol being done up to 4 times for every classification of a special symbol.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is special symbol by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. It is managed by each type of.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the holding ball number is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. , And stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). As described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the holding ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the number-of-holding-balls symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the first special symbol holding after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number-of-balls counter 223 c, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value for the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is held. The drawing of the image is controlled to display the ball number pattern in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 may also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control unit 110 and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol, respectively. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60), and turned off when the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  When special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 f and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223 g receive stop type command of the first special symbol and stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from main controller 110 (See S4301 in FIG. 61) and when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223 f or the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223 g is turned on, the stop type is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

  The effect counter 223 h is a counter used for selection of a fluctuation pattern, selection of various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is formed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by one and updated. Be done.

  The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The additional effect counter 223i is formed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, a value is added by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. It will be updated.

  The state setting area 223 j is a storage area in which information according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is stored in the status setting area 223 j every time the status command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S 4405 in FIG. 62). . More specifically, a storage area of 2 bits is allocated to the state setting area 223j, and whether or not it is a high probability state of a special symbol in order from the upper bit, whether it is a high probability state of a normal symbol or not A value indicating that is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that it is a definite variation state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol), and if it is "10B", it is latent It means that it is a firm state (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol). On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a low probability state of a normal symbol).

  By updating the status setting area 223 j in accordance with the status command output from the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113 can accurately grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10.

  The remaining-time short-time area 223 k is a storage area for storing the remaining number of times of the high probability state of the normal symbol. The remaining short time area 223 k is updated to the number notified by the remaining short time number command output each time the value of the time reduction counter 203 f is updated in the main control unit 110 (see S 4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining short time area 223 k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the short time counter 203 f of the main control unit 110. It can be made to coincide with the actual number of times the main control unit 110 updates.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n indicate the corresponding fluctuation time when the respective fluctuation display is set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processing (see S4111 in FIG. 72) is executed, each value is decremented by 1 (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). The period from the reception of the special view temporary stop command from main controller 110 to the reception of the special view 1 restart command is the case where various counter update processing (see S4111 in FIG. 72) is executed. Also, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is configured not to be decremented by one.

  Then, in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67), which is executed when it is determined that the temporary stop related command is received in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60), the remaining fluctuation time is calculated. Reference is made (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

  The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol fluctuation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special Remaining period information stored when setting additional effects in the case of resuming fluctuation display of a symbol is referred to.

  The card notification completion flag 223 q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forget alert screen is displayed. It is set.

  The card notification enable flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the card forget warning alert screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notified), and the card forget alert alert screen can be displayed. It is set to on when the following conditions are met.

  The rush display completion flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not rush game has been started in the state where the latent state is set, and a rush rush screen showing that rush game has been started (see FIG. 7). When (a) and FIG. 8 (b) are displayed, it is set to ON.

  The prize ball number counter 223 u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls after the jackpot game is started, and the prize ball number during the period in which the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. The numbers are configured to be cumulative. Specifically, when it is determined in the hit-related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) that the winning ball command has been received (S4505 in FIG. 63: Yes), the value corresponding to the received winning ball command is added ( S4506 in FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to obtain a large number of prize balls in the small hit game in addition to the big hit game, so the small according to the value of the award ball number counter 223u It is configured to be able to execute a card forgetting alert display after the end of the hit game or after the end of the jackpot game for which a small number of rounds is set.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether a momentary power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, and is set to ON before the power-off process is performed (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58) in the startup processing (see FIG. 58) of the audio lamp control device 113, the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then constant. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 has started up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information which is incomplete because only a part of the information is erased) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 74B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first is entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by fluctuation effect when the ball entering the ball entrance 64b2 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to generate the main power-on time shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in Fig. 25 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" on the display screen of the main image at power-on and at the bottom right of the screen, as shown in FIG. The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the fluctuation effect when it is “big hit of the special symbol”, and is “out of special symbol” in FIG. The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. If it is determined that the power-on change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on change image resident in the power-on change image area 235b, the image shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (c) is generated. Are instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that the symbols are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third The symbol display device 81 can be displayed immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the range of the back side image and the back side image stored in the back side image area 235c among the back side images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory view for explaining the four types of back side images and the range of the back side images stored in the back side image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back side image; FIG. 26 (b) shows the back side B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “empty stage” with respect to the back side A corresponding to the “mid-town stage” . Moreover, FIG. 27 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to an "island stage."

  As the back surface images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, as shown in FIG. 26, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on the respective back faces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back face images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the change of the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 The image controller 237 is controlled such that the image on the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by setting the position between the position a and the position a 'of the corresponding back image first as the initial position of the display area. . Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the back image on the back E is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Of FIG. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, in the back E, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are the third pattern in a state where the displayed position is fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, a back surface image shown in FIG. 27A is displayed as an initial back surface image of the back surface E. In the back image shown in FIG. 27A, an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time passes, the back image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the back image shown in FIG. 27B, a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 27C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 27 (a) is returned to, and the back image of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 26A, the back surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the initial stage "town stage", so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the frequently displayed "town stage" is displayed. By making all the data resident in the rear image area 235 c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "Mori stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "kawa stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 27 (a) and FIG. 27 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, in order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but if doing so, the resident video RAM 235 As a very large amount of RAM must be used, this may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range of FIG. Image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIG. 27 (a) and (b)) including its initial position, and the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the change of the stage is determined by the lottery at the start of the change. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surfaces B to D can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to an image in a partial range is stored for the back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surfaces B to D face the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surface E displays the images of FIGS. 27A and 27B using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 27 (a), so that the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 27 (b)-(c) and 27 (c)-(a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while the images in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) are displayed, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and 27 (c) Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27 (b)-(c) and 27 (c)-(a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

  In the back surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236 a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back faces B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b 'and the position b. Image data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 occurs, in the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the change effect is not immediately started at 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. Since the display control device 114 changes the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 by being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, and is used for residence. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out image data previously resident in the character pattern area 235 e of the video RAM 235. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect starts from now on This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one fluctuation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town center stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "empty stage" and "island stage"). Information for specifying whether to display one or displaying a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. Moreover, when specifying to display the back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to a stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table “0000H” describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 29) indicates the data table "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 29 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 29).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see FIG. 75B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75 (b) (see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later (see FIG. 30) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 75 (b In S6303), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 30, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. 30, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 75 (b Every time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This processing is performed each time the drawing processing (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) of the processing is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The rear surface image change flag 233 w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233 w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233 w is set to ON when the rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S 7001 of FIG. 81A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is performed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, it is possible to display a rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface image change command and the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The rear image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. The flag is formed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear surface image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear surface image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear surface image notified by the command is set to on (see FIG. 81 (a). See S7002)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The rear face type currently set can be easily specified by the rear face image determination flag 233x.

  The demonstration display flag 233 y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that demonstration is in progress, and if it is off, it means that demonstration is not in progress. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demonstration display data table is displayed. Other display data tables are set to OFF when they are set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), and S6805 in FIG. 78 (b)). (See S6905 in FIG. 79). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether a demonstration effect is currently being performed.

  The finalized display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the finalized display effect is being executed. Here, the finalized display effect refers to an effect of stopping and displaying (finalized display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the finalized display flag 233z is on, it means that a static display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the static display effect is not on. The finalized display flag 233z is set to ON when the finalized display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and the other than the finalized display data table When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), 79, S6905). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the current display effect is being performed by the finalized display flag 233z.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the second collision random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When reaching 479, 99, 232, 99, respectively, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed, as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display device 37 (S104). Thereafter, the start winning process is executed in association with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process (S105) is performed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing a ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are performed. A symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the normal symbol variation processing is executed, the launch control processing is executed (S108), and the other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32, the content of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, it is first determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and when it is determined that a big hit is a middle hit or a small hit (S201: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the special view temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is being interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with a symbol indicating a hit. In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), that is, the processing of causing the first symbol display device 37 to continue the variable display with respect to the special drawing in which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted, and the present processing is ended. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S201 that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates If it is determined that the value of special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (S208) is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S209 where the variation process relating to the special figure 2 is performed. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation in progress processing (S205) is executed. The first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S205) is to execute the processing in special figure 1 variation, and the detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S205) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of variation time (special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206), If it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S206: No), the process of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

  In the process of S209-S213, the process similar to S204-S207 performed with respect to the special figure 1 is performed. When the process of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 2 is in the process of variation) (S209). If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process is ended. Details of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S209 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation in progress processing (S211) is executed. The second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) is to execute the process in the special figure 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation in progress processing (S211) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of variation time (special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is 0) (S212), If it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S212 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a first special symbol variation start process (S208) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S208).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (N1) It is determined whether or not is a value greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (S303), the ball holding ball number command for notifying the voice ball control device 113 of the ball holding number command showing the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d after subtraction is set (S304) .

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value as the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223c. As described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the holding ball number counter 203d.

  When the process of S304 is finished, next, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  When the process of S305 is finished, next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of S306 ends, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a as a result of the determination of the first special symbol This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is ended, next, the game state update process is executed (S308). The gaming state update process (S308 in FIG. 36), which will be described in detail later, indicates the state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of the probability change flag 203g, the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f. Is a process for updating the When the process of S308 ends, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S302 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34, about the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S204 in FIG. 33) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during a period in which the variable display (big hit fluctuation) winning the big hit is executed in any one of the special symbols, whether or not the big hit is won in the other special symbol lottery. It is configured not to make a determination.

  That is, in a state in which it is determined that a big hit game is to be performed after a predetermined period (after a variation time has elapsed) by one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol lottery wins a big hit and multiple times in a short period of time It is configured to suppress winning of the jackpot and excessively granting benefits.

  As described above, processing for acquiring various counter values is performed in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, and determination based on the various counter values acquired in the processing is skipped, and out-of-patterns are set. It can respond promptly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery of.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to on (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability state, latent state). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (ie, it is a probability variation state of a special symbol) (S402: Yes), a random number value that becomes a jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a for high probability time It is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches or not, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S402 that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol low probability state) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified jackpot random number value matches the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag is on (S405). When it is determined that it is not on (ie, off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406), and if the lottery result is a big hit ( S406: Yes, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value according to the current gaming state is the winning state storage area The value is stored in 203 j (S410), 1 is set in the time reduction counter 203 f (S411), and this processing is ended.

  Here, by setting the value of the hour reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) and the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34) It is possible to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state in the gaming state update process (S308) to be executed later than the above. Thereby, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol lottery, it becomes possible to set the low probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation is started. Therefore, by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the state in which the probability change state is set, the probability change state can be shifted to the latent state.

  Also. The process of setting the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on condition that the jackpot is won, and the variation of the special symbol Any of the processing to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on condition that the number of times has reached the predetermined number can be executed using the gaming state update process (S308). Thereby, even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high probability state of the normal symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main control device 110 from being complicated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203h is on (S405: Yes), or when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S406 (S406: No), the outlying symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol was determined to be a big hit, ie, 1 Determine whether the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the process of S407 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above.

  In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first acquired in the process of S401 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above Based on the value of the type counter C2 per unit, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S501 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (i.e., the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S503.

  In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the gaming state is read (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the process of S505, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S505), and then the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( S506).

  When the process of S506 is finished, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507), and then, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S508), and the process of S505. The value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in (4) is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a game state update process (S308) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this gaming state update process (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the state of the probability change flag 203g which is a condition for setting the gaming state, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f, only the value of the time reduction counter 203f is updated at the start of the special symbol change. In the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33), the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f is executed.

  And although the details will be described later, the probability variation flag 203g set to on is set to off when the jackpot variation is finished and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed) It is configured as follows.

  In other words, one of the two condition elements (the state of the probability change flag 203g, the value of the time reduction counter 203f) referred to when setting the gaming state is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, the other condition elements By making it possible to update the special symbol at the time of the change stop of the special symbol, it is possible to facilitate diversification of the gaming state set by combining the two condition elements. In addition, since it is possible to set a specific gaming state (for example, the state of latency) only during a period from when the variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends, it is advantageous for the player only during a predetermined period. It becomes possible to set the gaming state.

  When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S602), and the remaining time shortness command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the hour reduction counter 203f is 0 (S604), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S604: Yes), then it is determined whether the positive variation flag 203g is set on (S605) ). Here, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S605: No), since it is a probability change state (that is, a latent state) in which the time saving game is not provided, it indicates a latent state A status command is set (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S605 that the positive variation flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), since it is in the normal state, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S607). Finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), the process is ended as it is.

  In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be continued until the jackpot of the special symbol is won next time (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot). In addition to this, for example, instead of the probability variation flag 203g, a probability variation counter is provided, and the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0 when the variation of the special symbol is executed and the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted In this case, the high probability state of the special symbol may be shifted to the low probability state.

  When such a configuration is used, the gaming state updating process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is regarded as the special state variation start gaming state updating process, and separately from this, at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is finished. Processing to determine whether to end the special symbol high probability state by providing a special figure fluctuation stop gaming state update processing to update the value of the probability change counter, and whether to end the normal symbol high probability state Can be executed at different timing from the process of determining whether the

  Next, referring to FIG. 37, the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S205) executed in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 of FIG. 31) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. Give an explanation. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S205). In the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S205), processing for resuming the subtraction when the subtraction of the variation time in the special view 1 is interrupted, and processing for subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special view temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a case where this processing is executed in a state in which the special view temporary stop flag 203v is set to on will be briefly described. As described above, the special view temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special view 2 is changing and the special view 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a small hit. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the large hit middle flag 203o is set to ON within the processing, so the timer interrupt executed by the main control unit 110 every 2 milliseconds. When the process loops and the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed next time (2 ms after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set on), a big hit is in process in S201. Since it is determined that the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S205) is not performed. And the big hit game (or small hit game) ends, and it is determined that it is not a big hit (or a small hit) in the process of S201, and the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation under-execution process (S205) is executed with the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v set to ON is a big hit (or small hit) game. It is configured to end at the timing to resume the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, which has been interrupted the subtraction of the fluctuation time.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. In the process of S701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), next, the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command is set (S702), the special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to on (is set to off) in the process of S701 (S701: No), the process of S702 and S703 is skipped to perform S704. Move to the process of

  In the process of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is decremented by 1 and updated (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S207).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S802), and the special figure (2) A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed with the symbol (S804).

  After the process of S804, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability change flag 203g are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

  On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to off for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S807 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S808.

  In the process of S808, a special view 1 determination command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is to be determined and stopped is set (S808). Thereafter, the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S809), and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), processing (S802 to S809) is executed to stop the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S801: Yes), processing (S803, S804) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the variable display is executed.

  In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the second special symbol in the variable display is removed and forcibly stopped and displayed by the symbol. It is not limited to For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. And after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be resumed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more natural aspect as compared to the case where the forced stop is caused by disengaging. In the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S806 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). For example, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may do it.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210). In the second special symbol variation start process (S210), a process for starting the variation of the special view 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the processing relating to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the target of variation is only different from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Detailed description of the elements is omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation start process (S209), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to be off (S902), and this processing is ended. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag which is set to ON while making the stop display corresponding to the second special symbol come off at the same time as the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, as described above. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that the jackpot will be started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on in the process of S901, the present process is ended without executing each process of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b Data (various counter values) is acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether there is acquired data (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S904: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol big hit determination processing for executing the big win determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value Execute (S905). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S 905 ends, next, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S 903, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is executed (S 906) . The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S906 is completed, the above-described gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this process is ended.

  Next, referring to FIG. 40, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same processing as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above is performed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) The differences between the

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the processing of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not a big hit is performed based on each of the acquired counter values and the state of the probability variation flag 203g. In each of these processes, the point that the counter value used for lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b is different, and the other is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Control is performed.

  When the process of S1003 or S1004 ends, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1005). If it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S1006) and it is determined that it is a big hit (S1006: Yes), the processing of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol as a jackpot is executed, and this processing is ended. In each of the processes of S1007 to S1010, the same processes as the respective processes of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a big hit in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. Be done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1005 (S1005: Yes), or that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big win in the process of S1006. If it is determined (S1006: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process for setting the stop symbol corresponding to the small hitting or the detachment of the second special symbol is executed (S1011), and this process is ended. The details of the special view 2 deviation variation process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special view 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1011).

  In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 in FIG. 40 is the small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), the lottery result is the small hit If it is determined that (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, a small hitting symbol indicating a small hitting type corresponding to the value of the obtained small hitting type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), the out-of-design of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and This process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 42, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. Will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Then, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1202). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is made is determined based on whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on for the second special symbol. This special view 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1007 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above, the big hit from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) The type is determined (S1204).

  When the process of S1204 is completed, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1205), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to the process of S1208.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set in the process of S1202 (S1202: No), the special figure 2 out-of-variation variation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process goes to S1208. Transition.

  In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Subsequently, the variation start of the second special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S1209), and a value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1205 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n ( S1210), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special view out-of-two variation pattern selection process (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special view 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207).

  In the special pattern 2 out-of-variation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1302). Then, the small hitting type is selected based on the value of the small hitting type counter C5 and the small hitting type selection table 202e (refer to FIG. 16B) (S1303).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the fluctuation pattern of the small hitting corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the read fluctuation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1305). Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hitting fluctuation pattern is set (S1306), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of place) (S1301: No), a variation pattern selection table (FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) (S1307), and the out-of-out fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1308). Thereafter, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected outlier fluctuation pattern (S1309), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, in the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S211) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211). In the second special symbol variation under-execution process (S211), processing for resuming the subtraction when the subtraction of the variation time in Special Figure 2 is suspended, and processing for subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation in progress processing (S211) is executed, first, the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is decremented by 1 and updated (S1401), and the second special symbol display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Are updated (S1402), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (S213). The second special symbol variation stop process (S213) is to execute a process when stopping the variation of the special figure 2.

  When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to on (S1501), the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to on If it is determined (S1501: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S1503). Next, when the process of S1503 is finished, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed with the symbol (S1504). Next, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, the probability change flag 203g, and the time reduction counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the process of S1509, a special view 2 determination command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is to be determined and stopped is set (S1509). Thereafter, the process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1501 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 off stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-mentioned S1509 and S1510 The process of is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the special figure 2 off stop processing (S1508) which is one of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special view 2 off stop processing (S1508). In this special figure 2 off stop process (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, out), the special figure 2 showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the drawing result of the special figure 2 is a small winning, the process for temporarily stopping the special figure 1 change being executed is executed.

  In the special view 2 off stop process (S1508), first, it is determined whether the small hitting flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is on is set (S1603).

  After the process of S1603, the small hitting scenario is set based on the selected small hitting type (S1604). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203k is set to off (S1605), and the small hit middle flag 203p is set to on (S1606).

  When the process of S1606 is completed, a special figure 2 determination command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to set and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). Thereafter, the second special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped fluctuating with the small hitting symbol (S1608), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1601 that the small hitting flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is decidedly stopped. The special figure 2 determination command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1609). Thereafter, the second special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S1610), and the present process is ended.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and parallelly executable, it is possible to simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute more special symbol lottery games within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot is given to the player within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed by either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state in which the temporary stop or measurement of fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in the display mode or the notification mode that shows the player that the temporary stop is in progress, the player loses the lottery game which was in the process of the variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not, and can play the jackpot game with ease.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the start winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), it is determined if the game ball enters (winning) the first ball entry (first starting) 64 and the ball is entered (winning) if the ball is entered (winning) It is a process which stores each acquired counter value in the 1st special symbol holding ball storage area 203a to the upper limit number (maximum 4 pieces at the first ball entrance 64). In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the holding ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a A process is performed to predict in advance the result of the pass / fail determination, the variation pattern to be selected, and the like. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 which is the first start opening (start winning) (S1701). Here, it discriminate | determines using the detection result of the 1st ball entering switch (not shown) which detects the ball entering of the ball to the 1st ball entrance 64. As shown in FIG. If it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702) ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the number of reservations for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the number of reservations is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (S1704). A holding ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the number of holdings is set (S1705). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, are read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Each is put on hold (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding hold number of balls (S1706).

  Next, on the basis of the stored counter values, the hit / not determined result of the first special symbol, the hit type determined, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including the predicted success / failure determination result of the first special symbol, the hit type, and the variation pattern is set (S1708), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening (first ball entrance) 64 and is newly stored on hold, the result of the pass / fail determination based on the information stored on the hold. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. In this way, based on the result of the determination of whether the holding ball is stored, the display mode of the holding ball can be changed (for example, the color of the holding ball can be changed in a different color from normal) and displayed It is possible to display a notice symbol or the like and execute an effect that suggests the player a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, lower first ball entry port 64b2 Is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time and the like of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S1801). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is in the middle of the display showing the second symbol display device 83 showing the hit. In the middle of being done is included. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S 1801: Yes), a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can not be started (executed), so it is as it is This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit is not in the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S1801: No), next, whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (during normal symbol change) If it is determined (S1802) and the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (during normal symbol change) (S1802: No), that is, even if the current symbol is a normal symbol, the normal symbol variation If it is determined that there is no condition, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery drawing), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the suspension of fluctuation display in the normal symbol) The number of times M) is acquired (S1803).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1804), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 0 (S1804: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S1805) The data stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1806).

  In the process of S1806, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the normal symbol hold first area → execution area, the normal symbol hold second area → the normal symbol hold first area, the normal symbol hold third area → the normal symbol hold second area, the normal symbol hold fourth area → Shift the data in each area in such a way as normal symbol hold third area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1807).

  Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second collision type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 10”, it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol is When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "232", It is determined that the symbol is off normally.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S1808 is the hit of the normal symbol (S1809), and when it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S1809: Yes), the hit time The display mode of is set (S1810), and the process proceeds to the process of S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol of "o" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S1812), and the process shifts to the process of S1811. In the process of S 1812, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S1811.

  When the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (short time state) of the normal pattern in the process of S1811 (S1811), the high probability state of the pachinko machine 10 (short time) If it is determined that it is the state) (S 1811: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S 1813), and then the common drawing short variation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814) This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol (the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S1811: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this processing ends.

  In addition, the common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t set to ON in the processing of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. It is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the motorized accessory 64a. In this way, it is possible to vary the release operation content of the motorized prize 64a in accordance with which gaming state the variation (lottery) start timing of the normal symbol and the opening operation timing of the motorized prize 64a are.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state at the timing of fluctuation (lottery) start (execution) of the normal symbol is temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit in the gaming state storage means capable of always storing the currently set gaming state, the gaming state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is A storage area for temporary storage may be provided. Furthermore, there is provided means for constantly storing the period in which the normal state is set, and the period stored in the means (period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing at which the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. By doing this, the gaming state may be determined at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. That is, any configuration may be employed as long as it has storage means capable of storing the currently set gaming state and storage means capable of storing at least the gaming state set at a predetermined timing in the past.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1802 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the change time of the change display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 elapses It is determined whether or not it has been made (S1816). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S1810 or the processing of S1812.

  When it is determined in the process of S1813 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1816 that the variation time of the currently displayed variation display has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the process of S1817, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S1810, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lit display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lit display) Is set as Note that the period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part in the blinking display (alternate display of “o” and “x”) indicating that the second symbol is changing is lit longer To be displayed (fixed display). This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, the second symbol display update process (S2208 in FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device In the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device.

  After the process of S1817 is finished, next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) (current lottery result) It is determined whether it is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818). If it is determined that the lottery result this time is an out-of-order symbol (S1818: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S1818: Yes), it is next determined whether the common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

  If it is determined in the process of S1819 that the common drawing short variation flag 203t is not set to ON (is set to OFF), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the current normal symbol is started. If it is determined that it is in the normal state (S1819: No), the release time of the motorized accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, and the release count is set to 1 (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1820. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1819 that the common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing at which the current lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started is short. If it is (S1816: Yes), the common drawing short change flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (time reduction) (S1821).

  When it is determined in the process of S1821 that the current gaming state is not the short time state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing at which the current lottery (variation) of the normal symbol starts is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing to set the opening operation of the motorized accessory 64a is in the normal state, the opening period of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball inlet 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set. The setting is made once (S1824), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1823.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the short time state (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the current lottery (variation) of the normal symbol starts, and the current gaming state (the opening operation of the electric role 64a) Because the timing to set both is short time, the opening period of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (motorized symbol The long release operation of 64a is set (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the motorized prize 64a to be executed based on the winning of the normal symbol is set. It is configured to set the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the motor-operated accessory 64a only when both are in the short time state.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to strictly set the conditions under which the opening operation that is advantageous to the player is set, so for example, the lottery of the normal symbol in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state Even if the time variation state is set until the variation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol is set, the long release is set as the operation of the motorized prize 64a. There is no such thing. In addition, the player wins a hit in the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol executed in the same manner as the time saving state is set, and the normal condition is set as the gaming state until the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. Also in the case, the long opening of the motorized role piece 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the provision of excessively advantageous benefits (long opening of the electrically operated accessory 64a) to the player.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the electric character 64a from being long-opened in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is easy to be executed The period can be limited during the short time condition. In the present embodiment, the gaming state in the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing for setting the opening operation of the motorized accessory 64a is determined, and the gaming state set in each timing is determined. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the motorized part 64a based on that, any other configuration may be used.

  For example, the opening operation which is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the motorized accessory 64a is set are in the normal state (S1824 in FIG. 48) The release operation set in step S2 may be set (the short release operation may be set), and in the other state, the long release (the release operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48) may be set. By configuring in this manner, a benefit (long open) advantageous to the player is also provided for the normal symbol fluctuation executed in the period before and after the time saving state which is the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Time saving can be made more advantageous to the player.

  As described above, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes very short as "10 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further, Since the opening period of the lower first inlet 64b2 is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first inlet 64b2. Become. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is ended, so the jackpot game is in the normal state during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small hitting game is executed, since the time saving state is set continuously unless the time saving end condition is established, the small running is performed while the time saving state is set. During a hit game, the first variable winning device 65 opens in a small hit game, and a period in which the electric combination 64a opens is long, and a plurality of winning openings (first specified winning opening 65a, lower first entry ball opening) This is a specific period during which it is easy to enter the ball into 64b2).

  By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the motorized prize 64a and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are disposed above the first variable winning device 65. It is good to configure the ball to enter two winning openings (V winning device 65a, lower first ball entry 64b2) during small hitting game, whereby the number of winning balls obtainable during small hitting game Can be increased, and it is possible to give more advantageous benefits to the player.

  Referring back to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening / closing control start of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set (S1823), and this process is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 64a is set by the process of S1823, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S1824 or S1822 end.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not the passing of the gaming ball in the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is made. This process is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 if there is any.

  In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the gaming ball at the normal ball entry (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number M of holding times of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1903).

  If the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or if the game ball has passed through the normal entry (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1904).

  When the process of S1904 is finished, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is displayed as the empty reservation area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 The process is stored in the first area of the area to the reserved fourth area (S1905), and this processing is ended. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is set that the lottery based on the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 provided by the lottery result of the normal symbol (the second symbol) becomes a winning game state becomes an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state .

  By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the predetermination result of the common drawing, the player can play a game without missing a gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using the prior determination result of such a common drawing, not only the effect based on the pass / fail judgment result of the common drawing, but the electric combination 64a is opened when the common drawing is determined to be a hit. It is good to do the production which suggests the timing of By doing this, the normal gaming state plays a game aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (the ball entry port accompanied by the electric character 64a) is the game board 13 It is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called, right-handed) before the electric role item 64a performs the opening operation, even in the case of being arranged on the right side of However, there is an effect that the possibility of the ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 can be increased.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution to start the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is further judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105), and if not stored (S2104) S2105: No), since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off has not ended normally, the processing shifts to S2110 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S2110. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) in the case of initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of business opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM, the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2113.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), the occurrence information of power off is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S2108) while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203. Next, a payout recovery command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S2109), and the process shifts to the processing of S2110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2113). Thereafter, the state of the probability change flag 203g and each value of the short time counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the process of S2115 ends, the interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process shifts to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the process of updating the counter and the process upon power-off are roughly divided.

  In the main processing, first, each control device of the sub side (peripheral control device (output control device such as command) stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) The external output processing to be sent to is executed (S2201).

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). The jackpot control process is executed (S2204). The jackpot control process (S2204) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 53. A process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot gaming process (S2204) is executed, the small hitting control process (S2205) is executed. This small hitting control process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the motor-operated combination opening and closing process is executed (S2206). In the motorized jack product opening and closing process (S2206), an opening and closing process of the motorized jack item 64a is performed. Thereafter, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, symbol of "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entry (through gate) 67, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired at the timing when it passes, and the second symbol display device The variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out. Then, the second symbol (normal symbol) is drawn according to the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit, the electrically driven accessory 64a is released for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S2210) If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to S2201, and the above-described S2201 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S2210: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. 1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S2211).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2202 (S2212).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is variably displayed. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S2209, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 50 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S2213 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S2213), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S2214). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S2215), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2209 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2201 to S2208, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S2201. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S2201. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2201. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, or the first specified prize It is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a.

  In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2301: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303) . More specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) in the process of S2302, and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario in the process of S2303. It is determined whether it is a value corresponding to

  If it is determined in the process of S2303 that it is the timing of the opening start (big hit start) of the big hit scenario (S2303: Yes), a big hit opening command is set (S2304), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), it is then judged whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

  If it is determined in the process of S2305 that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 650a in jackpot is executed ( S2306), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2305 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), it is next determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is met ( S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, while the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a is open, a total of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total, or When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has passed a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the processing of S2308 is set to close the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a which is currently open, This process ends. The above-described determination processing of S2305 to S2307 is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2307 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of ending effect (S2309). If it is the start timing of (S2309: Yes), the jackpot ending command is set (S2310), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2309 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (S2311). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. If it is determined in the processing of S2311 that the end timing of the jackpot is reached (S2311: Yes), the jackpot end processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S2312), and the present processing is ended. The details of the jackpot end process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the big hit (S2311: No), this processing ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end processing (S2312) which is one of the jackpot control processing (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. The jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2312).

  In the jackpot end processing (S2312), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 203j (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the present jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (a jackpot type in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the termination of the jackpot game) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, the determination is performed based on the jackpot type set this time. If it is determined in the process of S2402 that the present jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process shifts to the processing of S2404. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2402 that the current jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2404. Thereby, the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  Next, the value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning and the jackpot type read out in the process of S2401 is set in the time reduction counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, "10,000" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, "big hit B When “is set, the value of the hour reduction counter 203f is set to“ 100 ”in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the number of times of variation of the special symbol becomes 100 times.

  When the process of S2404 is finished, the jackpot flag 203o is then set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). Thereafter, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S2406), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning are determined, and two condition elements for setting the gaming state after the jackpot game end The contents of (the probability change flag 203g and the time reduction counter 203f) are set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hitting control process (S2205) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting control process (S2205).

  In the small hitting control process (S2205), first, it is judged whether a small hitting scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special view 2 off stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed to determine whether a small hit scenario is set. If the small hitting scenario is not set in the process of S2501 (S2501: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the small hitting scenario is set in the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hitting scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hitting scenario (S2503). More specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter (not shown) in the process of S2502, and the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter (not shown) in the process of S2503 is the small hitting scenario. Determine whether it is a value corresponding to the opening start of.

  If it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the opening start timing of the small hitting scenario (S2503: Yes), the small hitting opening command is set (S2504), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the small hitting scenario (S2503: No), it is then determined whether it is the round starting timing of the small hitting scenario (S2505).

  If it is determined in the process of S2505 that it is the timing to start the round of the small hitting scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hitting operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process is ended. The details of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hitting scenario (S2505: No), it is then determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, while the specified winning opening 65a is open, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, five) in total are won, or the opening period of the specified winning opening 65a has passed a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in the process of S2507 that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2508, and this process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is the timing for starting the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the small hitting ending command is set (S2510), and this processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hitting (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed.

  If it is determined in the process of S2511 that the end timing of the small hit is reached (S2511: Yes), the small hit middle flag 203p is set to OFF (S2512), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and the present process is ended. The details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506).

  In the small hit operation setting process (S2506), first, an open scenario in which an open operation corresponding to the number of small rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is ended.

  As described above, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Problems can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning process (S2513) which is one process in the small hitting control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this second winning process (S2513). The second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning on the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a round effective period (S2701). Here, the round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (five seconds) ends. In the process of S2701, if it is not a round effective period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the present is a round effective period (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specified winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a If no winning is not detected (S2703: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u for updating (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or less than the upper limit (5 in the present embodiment) S2705: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705: Yes), closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 attached thereto) is set (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and the process ends.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S4117 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") in the current startup process (see FIG. 59). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S4002). As described later with reference to FIG. 59, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S4117 when the power-off occurrence information is received from the main control device 110 (see S4114 of FIG. 59). The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4117 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S4117 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S4116 after a momentary power failure occurs, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-off process of S4117. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is performed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is instantaneous when the power-off flag is turned on until the processing of S4008 is performed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, that the start processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  When the process of S4009 skips the process of S4009 when the process of S4008 is performed via the processes of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S4101 was performed last time (S4101), and one millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the processing proceeds to S4111 without performing the processing of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is a process relating to display (rendering) in S4102 to S4110, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. Since the process of S4111 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S4104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S4110, various counter update processes are executed (S4111), and the process shifts to the process of S4112. The details of the various counter update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 is executed, and the process shifts to the process of S4113. Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed control device 114 The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to The details of the variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the command determination processing (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . The details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (S4112), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the special view from the main control unit 110 It is determined whether a 1 stop type command or a special view 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command or the special view 2 stop type command is received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process is ended. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: No), whether a state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4203). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4203: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal state, positive change state, latency) A process of setting state) in the state setting area 223 j is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the status command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether the special view 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

  In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206), The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4207), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can identify that it is the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol In the case of

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special view 1 change pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether the special view 2 change pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in the process of S4208 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4210), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol In the case of

  If it is determined in the process of S4208 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the received holding ball number command (that is, the first The number of balls held for variation display of special symbol) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value ( S4212), this processing ends. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol (special figure 2) does not have a configuration for holding the lottery of the special symbol (special figure 2), so in the process of S4212 the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) holding ball number counter 223c Only the process to update is executed.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first ball entrance 64, the process of S4212 is performed each time there is a starting winning. The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. If the ball holding number command is notified based on winning, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol holding ball number of the main control unit 110 It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203 d.

  If it is determined in the process of S4211 that the holding ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). In the process of S4213, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the information of the received winning information command (the special symbol lottery success or failure, the hit type, and the variation pattern) It sets to the storage area 223b (S4214), and ends this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4213 that no winning information command has been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning related command has been received from the main control device (S4216). If it is determined in the process of S4215 that a win related command has been received (S4216: Yes), a win related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the hit-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but the effect corresponding to the jackpot game or the small hit game executed when the jackpot or the small hit is won as a result of the drawing of the special symbol. A process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute display is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4215 that the win related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a remaining short command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4217). If it is determined in the process of S4217 that the remaining time short number command has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number of times update process (S4218) is executed. The details of the remaining number updating process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66, but for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining time short number command output from the main control device 110 A process of setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S4217 that the remaining-time short-time command has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4219). If it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and the present process ends. The details of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. However, the process for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received When the special figure 1 fluctuation resumption command or the special figure 2 fluctuation resumption command is received, processing for setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S4221), and the present process is ended. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command To send the display control device 114 to the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 60) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment, the process of determining whether a status command has been received (see S4203 of FIG. 60) The processing is configured in the previous stage of the processing (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60) for determining whether or not the variation pattern command of each special symbol has been received.

  By configuring in this manner, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from main controller 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) of main controller 110. Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then in the gaming state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) executed Even when the state command indicating that the state is changed is set, the gaming state currently set on the audio lamp control device 113 can be determined earlier than the special view 1 variation pattern command.

  Therefore, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the definite variation state is set, and the latent state is set during the jackpot variation, the audio lamp control device 113 side is set that the latent state is set. It is possible to easily set the fluctuation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command that causes the jackpot fluctuation in the determined state.

  Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the variation pattern command is performed at the previous stage of the determination processing of the state command, the variation pattern command corresponding to the above-mentioned big hit variation Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is first received, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the variable display indicating that the latent state has been set at the same time that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. By delaying the variable display indicating that the latent state has been set as described above, the timing for notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be played is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem arises of giving.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main control device 110 side, the game state is changed after the jackpot determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the change pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33) While the (playing state updating process (S308 in FIG. 33) is executed, the voice lamp control device 113 first executes a process (S4204 in FIG. 60) for determining the current playing state, and thereafter The variable display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous game state from being set and executed although the latent state is set.

  Further, by configuring the audio lamp control device 113 side to define the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110, it is necessary to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, stop type command reception processing (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (S4202). The stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, when the special view 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special view 2 is selected. When the stop type command is received, the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special view 1 stop type command or special view 2 stop type command (S4302). End the process.

  The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special view 2 stop type command is the second special symbol The types of stop are stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change simultaneously, it becomes possible to manage the stop type respectively, and execute appropriate change display Can.

  Next, referring to FIG. 62, state command processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the state command processing (S4204). This state command process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the state command processing (S4204) will be described below.

  In this state command processing (S4204), processing is performed to set the current gaming state to the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control unit 110, and the gaming state shifts to the latent state Processing for setting an effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) for notifying the player that the latent state is set, and the gaming state has shifted to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used to display the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  In the state command processing (S4204), first, from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined (S4401). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command has been received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, when the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), a latent notification annotating effect for notifying entry of the latent state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223 j (S 4405), and the process proceeds to the processing of S 4406.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 4402 that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), or the process of S4403, the received command is shifted to the latent state If it is not the state command to be shown (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4406.

  Next, it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to a normal state (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a status command indicating transition to the normal status (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the award ball number counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card notification completion flag 223q, and the card notification available flag The flag 223t is set to off for the rush display flag 223t (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411) This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the card informing completion flag 223q is set to off (S4407: No), the processes of S4408 and S4409 are skipped, and the processes of S4410 and S4411 are executed. End the process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the hit related process (S4216) which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the contents of the hit related process (S4216). In this hit-related processing, as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the processing for making the third symbol display device 81 execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the small hit game executed when winning in the big hit or small hit Processing is performed in response to various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the player wins a jackpot or a jackpot.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. A process for displaying a card forgetting reminder screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed based on the result.

  In the hit related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) has received the jackpot related command (S4501). When it is determined that the received command is the jackpot related command (S4501: Yes), the jackpot related process is executed (S4502), and the process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot related process (S4502) will be described which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received in the hit-related process (S4216) has received the jackpot start command (S4601). When the jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S4602), and the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the big hit start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S4603). If the round number command has been received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S4604), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number-of-rounds command, the round number command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In the case where information for indicating that a new round has been started is transmitted as a round update command from the main control unit 110 in order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit The round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of round update commands received is provided in the RAM 223 of the 113 when the round update command is received, and the current round on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Calculate the number and configure the number of display rounds command Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4603 that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command is received (S4605: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command not including card notification is set (S4608). That is, the process for not displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4607 that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set on (ie, off) (S4607: No), the current jackpot type is the jackpot A or jackpot B It is determined whether or not (S4609). If it is determined that the present jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), the display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, the process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the present jackpot type is not the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612: YES), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4613), and the above-described processing of S4610 to S4611 is executed, and the present process is executed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4612 that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the jackpot-related process (S4502 in FIG. 64), various display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game are gaming information (opening, In addition to the processing of setting the display content of the ending and the number of rounds, processing of whether or not to display a card forgetting reminder screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be executed.

  In this card forgetting alert screen, when the player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of winning balls in a game (big hit game, small hit game), the player borrows a card (balls) It is a notification mode for calling attention so as not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the card described above is satisfied when the number of winning balls obtained in the period from the normal state to the jackpot and from the transition to the normal state (continuous advantage period) satisfies the predetermined amount. It is configured to display a reminder screen.

  Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, in the jackpot (first hit) won in the normal state, a jackpot (big jack A, When the jackpot B) is won, the card notification to display the card forgetting alert screen at the end of the jackpot game is executed, and when the other jackpot (jackpot C, jackpot D) is won, card notification is executed It is configured not to.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a card forgetting alert screen is displayed for a player who has not obtained a predetermined amount of winning balls, and to continue playing a game while borrowing the balls. It is possible to prevent the player who feels off feeling uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, the present embodiment is configured to be able to set the gaming state (latency state) that is easy to execute the small hit game frequently in addition to the big hit game, so the player can repeat the small hit game repeatedly. In some cases, a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of winning balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of winning balls acquired by the player during the advantageous duration (the number of winning balls to be paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and when the accumulated result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), execution is performed at that time. It is configured to display a card forgetting alert screen on the ending screen of the middle jackpot game or the small jackpot game. Thereby, the card forgetting alert screen can be displayed to the player at an appropriate timing.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that a card forgetting alerting screen may be alert | reported only once in one advantageous continuation period. As a result, the card forgetting alert screen is frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling. Note that the method for displaying the card forgetting alert screen is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment. For example, a measuring unit for measuring an advantageous continuation period is provided, and an elapsed period since the card forgetting alert screen was displayed last time When the time exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgetting alert screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgetting reminder screen is displayed once (because the display condition for displaying the card forgetting alert screen is already satisfied), during the special symbol variation period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period) It is good to constitute so that a card forgetting alert screen may be displayed when a fluctuation pattern of 5 seconds or more is selected.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the fixed concept of the player that the card forgetting alert screen is displayed after the end of the big hit game. In addition, as a method for achieving the same effect, the jackpot warning screen may be displayed using the opening period of the small hit game.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4501 that the received command is not the jackpot related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received the small hit related command (S4503). When it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4503: Yes), the small hit related process (S4504) is executed, and the process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the small hit related process (S4504) which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting related process (S4504). In the small hit related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the small hit related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether the hit related command received in the hit related process (S4216) receives the small hit start command (S4701). When the small hitting start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small hitting display start command is set (S4702), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4701 that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S4703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S 4703: Yes), the display ending command is set (S 4704), and it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223 q is set to ON (S 4705) . If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223 q is set to ON (S 4705: Yes), a display ending command not including card notification is set (S 4706), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4705 that the card notification end flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to on (S4707: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to off (S4708), and a display ending command including card notification is set ( In step S4709, the card notification completion flag 223q is set to on (S4710), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after winning a jackpot in a normal state, even in a small hit game in which the display condition for displaying the card forgetting alert screen is not displayed in one game in the present embodiment, If the cumulative value of the number of winning balls acquired in the gaming period (the advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of winning balls reaches 250), the small hit The card forgetting alert screen is displayed even after the game is over. Thereby, the card forgetting alert screen can be displayed to the player at an appropriate timing.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S4503 that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not a winning ball command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a winning ball command (S4505: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (S4506), and then the card It is determined whether the notification completion flag 223 q is set to on (S 4507). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the award ball number counter 223u added in the process of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). If it is determined that the value of the award ball number counter 223u after the addition is 250 or more (S4508), the card notification enable flag is set to ON (S4509), and the award ball number command for display is set (S4510) , End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4507 that the card informing completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or that the number-of-winnings ball counter 223u after the addition is less than 250 in the process of S4508. When it discriminate | determines (S4508: No), the process of S4509 mentioned above is skipped, the process of S4510 is performed and this process is complete | finished.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) that the normal state has been set, and the value of the award ball number counter 223u is cleared. The winning balls number counter 223 u is configured to accumulate the winning balls number corresponding to the winning balls number command received during the period up to (the advantageous continuation period). Then, it is configured to display a card forgetting alert screen according to the value of the award ball number counter 223 u at the end of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) (at the ending screen display timing).

  Thus, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that is the trigger for setting the advantageous duration is a jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of winning balls in one jackpot game) In the case of winning the small hitting game during the advantageous continuation period, or when winning the big hit C again, the card forgetting alert screen can be displayed.

  Next, the remaining number updating process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the contents of the remaining number updating process (S4218). This remaining number of times updating process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the remaining time shorter number of commands from the main control device 110. On the basis of having received, the process of updating the contents set in the remaining short time area 223k, the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

  In the remaining number updating process (S4218), first, it is determined whether a remaining time short number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining short command has not been received (S4801: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the remaining short time number command has been received (S4801: Yes), a display short time number command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220). In this temporary stop related process (S4220), a process for determining the remaining time of the special view fluctuation time when the special view temporary stop command is received, and the third symbol display device when the special view 1 fluctuation restart command is received. A process of setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed at 81 is executed.

  When temporary stop related processing (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special view temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and when it is determined that it has not been received (S4901: No), fluctuation restart processing Execute (S4902). Details of the fluctuation restart process (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o remains A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process shifts to the processing of S4902.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the remaining fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and more than 15 seconds. If it is determined that there is less (S4906) and it is determined that it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), period B indicating that the remaining change time information storage area 223o is the normal remaining change time Is set (S4907), and the process shifts to the processing of S4902.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4906 that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 15 seconds (more than 15 seconds) (S4906: No), the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o indicates that the remaining fluctuation time is long. The period C is set (S4908), and the process shifts to the processing of S4902. As described above, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special drawing fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special drawing fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special drawing fluctuation time is interrupted) By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing of resuming the special figure fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, if the period information (period A to period C) to be set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is different corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when special figure fluctuation is resumed, However, for example, the period A is more easily selected as the remaining time is shorter, and the period information is selected so that the period C is more easily selected as the remaining time is longer. The ratio may be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining periods may be divided by a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) and the periods A to C may be ordered and distributed for each of the divisions. You may configure.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect performed based on the period information set in the remaining change time information storage area 223o and the remaining change time, and the remaining It can provide fun to predict time of change.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) is a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special view 1 fluctuation restart command is received.

  When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is judged whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001), and when it is judged that it has not been received (S5001: No), this process is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read out next (S5002 The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read remaining fluctuation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area o is cleared (S5005), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation resumes after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) is finished in the present embodiment. In the period until it is performed, the swing effect for displaying the third symbol is performed, and when the special figure change is resumed, the additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is performed. Although configured as described above, any other configuration may be used.

  For example, there is provided an effect period determination means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed, and when the effect period determination means determines that the normal effect period is over, the additional effect is executed. It is also good. By configuring in this manner, the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously performed, so it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display to the player. Moreover, in this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after resumption, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Or, a swing effect may be performed to swing and display the third symbol. Furthermore, an error period determination means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determination means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S4113). The variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is the first or special view 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation display effect Based on the display, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit G), processing is performed to set a special display 1 for display or a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

  In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), since the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control unit 110, the process proceeds to S5105. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to be off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variable display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the fluctuation display setting process (S5104) for Special Drawing 1 which is one process in the fluctuation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special view 1 variation display setting process (S5104). In this variation display setting for special view 1 (S5104), when the current gaming state is the latent state, for the display of the first special symbol based on the special view 1 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 A process of setting the latent variation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process for special drawing 1 (S5104), first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is read out (S5201), and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time read in the processing of S5201 is subspecially selected 1 It sets to fluctuation time counter 223m (S5202). Next, it is determined whether the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is a value larger than 0 (S5203). If it is determined that the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), a rush rush command for display is set (S5204), and rushed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5203 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is larger than 0 (S5203: Yes), the above-described processes of S5204 and S5205 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a display special variation pattern variation display command of the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), the special pattern 1 variation pattern command is extracted in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60) The variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5105). In addition, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable whether it is a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command of 2 bytes configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01" the second special symbol It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

  The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol set in the processing of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (see FIG. 59) of the main processing (see FIG. 59) It transmits to the display control apparatus 114 by S4102). By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the first special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5106).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Since there is, the processing of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to be off (S5108). Next, the special view 2 variation display setting process (S5109) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the variable display setting process (S5109) for the special view 2 which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special view 2 fluctuation display setting process (S5109).

  In the variation display setting process for special view 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), reading of the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is executed (S5301), and the variation read A value corresponding to time is set in sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5303). If it is determined that the state is the latent state (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush-displayed flag 223t is on (S5304). If it is determined that the rush-displayed flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than one second (S5306). When it is determined that the remaining time is less than one second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5308.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5306, when it is determined that the remaining time read is one second or more (S5306: No), the display rush command is set (S5307), and the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a display special variation variation pattern command for the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5304 that the rush-displayed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the processing of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the processing of S5309 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when setting the variation display of the first special symbol in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, that is, the latent state during the big hit fluctuation period When setting the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol variation, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in variation, and it is determined that the special figure 2 is not in variation. Is configured to set a rush entry command as an effect aspect of the variable display. That is, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that the rush has occurred on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the special figure 1 change of the object is executed doing.

  On the other hand, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period becomes the latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in motion, and the special figure When it is determined that 2 is changing, a screen (see FIG. 6B) indicating that the latent state is in progress is displayed without setting the display rush command as the effect mode of the variable display. It is configured to display.

  As a result, when a right-handed game is performed at the time when a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that a rush has been entered is set by setting the rush rush command for display, the game is immediately performed. The lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state can be executed, and the player can be provided with a game without discomfort.

  In addition, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation that becomes a latent condition during the jackpot fluctuation period, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in fluctuation, and the special figure 2 When it is determined that is changing, the special figure 2 fluctuation during the fluctuation may be forced to be terminated, and a new special figure 2 fluctuation may be executed.

  It should be noted that the setting timing of the display rush rush command when the gaming state is shifted to the latent state during the special figure 2 fluctuation is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment, and the player is provided with a game without discomfort. It is good if it has a configuration that can For example, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation during fluctuation is finished at the timing when the latent state is set, the display rush-in command may be set, or the fluctuation occurs at the timing when the latent state is set It may be configured to determine the remaining time until the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation in, and to set the display rush-in command when the determination result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, as the predetermined time to be set, it takes from the time the player operates the operation handle 51 to start the right hitting game until the ball fired by the right hitting game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be set shorter than the period, and may be set appropriately according to the configuration of the game board 13.

  Referring back to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) It transmits to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set on (that is, is off) (S5111: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to OFF and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to OFF (S5112).

  In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special view 1 stop type command or the special view 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process is ended. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. Moreover, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. . In addition, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and the notification is made even if the determination result is out. Be done. If the determination result is out, the out type is not referred to and the out pattern is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, various counter update processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter updating process (S4111). The various counter updating process (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the values of the various counters provided in the RAM 223 It is a process to execute an update.

  In the various counter updating process (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5401: No), the process of S5402 is skipped Transfer to processing of Next, it is determined whether the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). If it is determined that the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S5404).

  Next, the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and reading of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are executed (S5405), the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m The remaining time is calculated (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the value of other various counters is decremented by 1 (S5408), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (ie, it is 0) (S5403: No), S5404 to S5407 described above are skipped. , S5408, and this process ends.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S610, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S6001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S610 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S6101. And after repeating the process of S6102 several times including the process of S610-S6105 may be performed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the video RAM 235 for residence (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed to transfer (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the image at power on (the main image at power on or the fluctuation image at power on) (not shown) is drawn simply. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simplified display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is If there is a display fluctuation pattern command from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113, the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation presentation period, a simple fluctuation It is possible to make a presentation. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (a), the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern but the power-on image. The command determination process (S6302) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

  In the display setting process (S6303), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S6304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S6402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: YES), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77 (a), the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described. FIG. 77 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing (S6405). The variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S650. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S6406: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach out, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to ON (S6603), and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S6602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S6701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 6704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a command for the number of rounds (S6410: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6901, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display rush command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a rush entry command for use (S6414: Yes), rush entry command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 80 (a), the details of rush rush command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 80 (a) is a flowchart showing rush rush command processing. The rush-to-rush command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the rush entry command processing, first, a rush entry display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush entry effect indicated by the display rush entry command is determined, and the determined rush entry display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

  Next, based on the rushing display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6935), the rush rush command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command judgment processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no rush-in command for display (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an additional rendering command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional rendering is performed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), additional effect command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80 (b) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command process. This additional effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display additional effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the additional effect command for display is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. , And is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

  Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the additional effect command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no display additional effect command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the rear image change command process. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear surface image determination flag 233x provided for each rear surface image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is set on The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is displayed by the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, RAM type that specifies the back image type to be displayed at that time, and further specifies the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and stores the image data corresponding to the range of the back image Specify the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no rear surface image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command For example (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  In the process of S6401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S6308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 75B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)) which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image, which are set and necessary in that case, are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, in the process of S6502, the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7201: No ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 83, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S7301).

  In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Decide various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S7203, the process proceeds to S7205.

  At S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, then in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not (S7402). As a result, if it is the End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), end this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S7402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and for each sprite It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display is not yet performed and the finalized display is performed, so first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less along with the end of the fixed display effect, so a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the fixed display effect Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 7217), and the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 7218). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S7221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of the above image in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S7502) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 85 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S7602 (S7602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the resident video RAM 235 is not used. To the designated address of the video RAM 235 for residence. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S7603, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S7705: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S7706 (S7706: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has ended (S7706: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7705: No), the process moves to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag Is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, and therefore, the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710) and then provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state among the back image discrimination flag 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer object image data (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 7802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel, but it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variable display is being executed, another variable display may be configured to be infeasible. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as composition which carries out change display in order from a holding ball with which a starting winning combination is temporally old. By configuring in this way, control can be simplified, and processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the positive change state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol) Four game states are provided: state), short time state (special symbol low probability state and normal symbol high probability state) and latent state (special symbol high probability state and normal symbol normal state) There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

  That is, when the latent state is set, the variation time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol which is more likely to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another gaming state By defining the length to be shorter than that in the case where it is set, it is possible to most efficiently execute the lottery advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game characteristic of expecting the latent state to be set.

  Specifically, in addition to the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the first specified winning opening 65a is opened even in the case of a small hit, so that the variation time of the second special symbol is short. In the state, it is possible to keep increasing the winning balls. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of being in the latent state. In a general game machine, the probability change state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, since the latent state is more advantageous than the probability change state, novel game characteristics can be provided.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous) Adopts a fluctuation method). As a result, even while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a stop symbol of big hit or small hit, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with the stop stop pattern. In this way, it is possible to prevent the other variable display from being determined and displayed as a win or small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the jackpot or the small hit may be repeatedly started.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the variable display corresponding to the big hit of the first special symbol is executed Usually, the high probability state of the symbol shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so many lottery of the second special symbol may be executed. It is a possible period (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol at a probability of about 1/2, during the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, the small hit When the player wins the game, the small hit game to be executed is executed frequently, and a game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) advantageous to the player who can obtain many winning balls is achieved.

  As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol winning the jackpot in the probability change state Since it is (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), when special figure 2 advantageous state ends, big hit game will be executed. As described above, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol (special figure 2) and a small hitting game is executed, the variation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period Interrupt the measurement of the), when the small hitting game is over, it is configured to resume the measurement of the suspended display period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hitting game, so regardless of the number of small hitting games executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period. The player can be provided with a certain special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) in the movement is a stop display mode showing the detachment. It is configured to stop by force. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is made different according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit (a lottery result capable of giving the first benefit to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is that the lottery result is out of order. If the stop display is in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small hit (a lottery result capable of giving the player a second benefit different from the first benefit), the variation of the other special symbol Is suspended until the end of the second benefit award (until the small hit game is ended), and is resumed after the end of the second benefit award. In addition, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is out, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the lottery contents of the other special symbol (the period until the lottery result is displayed, the period until the lottery result is displayed) based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols. A variety of gameplay can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a lottery result capable of giving a bonus to the player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is made different according to the content of the bonus. Therefore, for example, in the case where the lottery result gives the player the most advantageous benefit (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result giving the benefit. Even if the player is forced to stop the change so that the lottery result deviates, the player is prevented from being given an extra benefit, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the jackpot game In the case of, in order to prevent the bonus based on the lottery of the other special symbol being given during the small hitting game, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed, the fluctuation table It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in the state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are simultaneously changing, the player is given the most inconvenient benefit by being granted the most advantageous benefit to be awarded later. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player does not get out of the game and to prevent a situation in which a player feels uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short display period (0.5 seconds) is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), The small hit game is configured to be able to be executed frequently. Then, the condition that the latent state is set as the gaming state, the condition that the latent state is ended as the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the first special symbol Since the stop display is in the display mode indicating the big hit and the big hit game is executed, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantage period which is advantageous to the player who is frequently played the small hit game. The second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to play the game with enthusiasm so that the first advantageous period is set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability change state, the latent state is set from the time of the jackpot fluctuation start, and the latency state In the state where is set, it is comprised so that the lottery of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) can be performed efficiently.

  Therefore, it is configured to notify the player of the period in which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is also the second in a state where the positive variation state is set. Both special symbols may change.

  In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) has been set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), The lottery of the second special symbol in the latent condition can not be executed until the special symbol stops fluctuating, and a problem occurs that the small hit game is not executed regardless of how long it is in the RUSH condition. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the fluctuation state of the second special symbol (presence or absence of fluctuation, The remaining fluctuation period is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is configured to be different.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the new second special symbol fluctuation is executable when the transition condition to the latent state is established, it is notified that the RUSH state is set. Configured. As a result, despite reporting that the RUSH state has been set, the variation of the new second special symbol is not started, and it is possible to suppress the situation where the small hitting game is not executed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied, the period until the latent state ends is determined after the variation of the new second special symbol becomes executable. When the determined period is less than the predetermined period, it is configured not to notify that the RUSH state has been set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the big hit game is started without the small hit game being executed, even though it is informed that the RUSH state is set.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the definite variation state, as the gaming state by transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts If it is configured to set the latent condition and wins the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol is not shifted to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts , It is configured to continue the definite change state even during the jackpot fluctuation. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide different game characteristics depending on the type of the special symbol.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and even when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the time It may be configured to set a latent state as a gaming state by transitioning to a special game type, and only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, it is normal at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. The high probability state of the symbol may be shifted to the low probability state to set the latent state as the gaming state.

  Furthermore, measure the number of big wins won during the advantageous continuation period, and when the measurement results reach a predetermined number, shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the time when the big hit fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent state as the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the definite variation state, the latent state is set in the period until the jackpot fluctuation ends at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information is ended based on the prediction that the jackpot will be won in the start winning processing (see FIG. 47). It may be configured to set a latent state for a period (a plurality of fluctuation periods) up to

  In this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the state where the latent condition is set, the variation pattern table is always constant regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol during the latent state setting. Although it is set as the composition which uses (refer to Drawing 19 (b)), it is not restricted to this, for example, the number of times of change of the 2nd special symbol after a latent state is set reaches predetermined times (for example, 50 times) It is also possible to provide discrimination means for discriminating whether or not it has been made, and to make the data table for selecting the variation pattern different based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

  Specifically, when the number of changes in the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the second special symbol changes by referring to the data table in which the average of the change time is about 2 seconds. If the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average of the fluctuation time is about 1 second. As a result, when a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is selected, more small hitting games can be provided to the player.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that a latent state may be set during the big hit change in a definite change state, the lottery result of a special symbol is a specific deviation or a small hit besides this. It may be configured such that the latent state is set during the variable display in the case, or during the definite change state, the lottery result of the special symbol falls off a specific number or the number of times of small hits reaches a predetermined number of times It may be configured such that the latent state is set when it occurs.

  In the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases) in the main control unit 110, the holding ball number command is Although the case of transmitting from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is increased in the main control device 110, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b by one when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 are each held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times Alternatively, the number may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the longitudinal direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, although the 3rd symbol display for showing a player the lottery result of each symbol is performed by one display means (3rd symbol display device 81), it uses composition of other than that. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be displayed emphatically to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Moreover, you may use structures other than a liquid crystal display as a structure of a display means.

  In each embodiment described above, in the gaming state (time reduction state) that is advantageous to the player, a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the gaming board 13 is executed, and in the normal gaming state, the left area of the gaming board 13 It is configured to execute the left-handed game aiming at the left-handed game, but it is sufficient if the aiming area of the game board 13 is made different according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state You may make the game run right. Further, while aiming at the same area, the game in different gaming states may be configured to be executable.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used to determine that the operating means has been operated by pressing the player as the operating means that can be operated by the player. The operation means may be configured as a lever that can be operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, or that the player is operated with contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operation means that can be determined, a wireless type operation means that can be determined to be operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Also, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. The operation control may be partially or entirely performed by the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the production performed using the display screen of the 3rd symbol display 81, and a game (lottery) itself is a sound lamp. Although the main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute, without being limited thereto, processing for executing a game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects The processing for this may be configured to be performed by the same control device. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes by one control device.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the type of the special symbol is not limited to this, and three or more The special symbol type of may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, the game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to the rule in which several special symbols were predetermined, and the game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is independently performed were demonstrated. However, each of the game characteristics described in the embodiments may be replaced or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (Possible to hit small during a special feature change)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the dynamic display means, and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information; A second determination means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means for indicating a first determination result specific to the first display means (1) When the identification information is displayed, the first benefit game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second benefit game A gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing There is a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to be executed than a single determination, and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to perform than the second determination. The gaming state setting unit is capable of setting the first gaming state in the dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine A1 characterized by.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) which is advantageous to the player during a period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (e.g. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, a period during which an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player is set is changed by a lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, executed during the advantageous gaming state If the winning game is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and the winning game is not immediately won by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine having a game characteristic of giving a bonus to the player in a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is largely different. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine A1, since it is possible to set the second determination to the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily performed during the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed, the length of the period in which the first gaming state is set Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a probability higher than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A game machine A2 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, rather than the first benefit game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means, the second benefit game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed This makes it possible to make the first gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in hope of setting the first gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game machine A1 or A2, a first ball entry means capable of entering game balls, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means The third ball entering means different from the means, the first state capable of guiding the gaming ball to the second ball entering means, and the third ball entering the second ball entering means being more difficult than the first state The first determination means is based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means; The second determination means is configured to be able to execute the second determination based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, and in the second gaming state, A gaming machine characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be easily changed to the first state than the first gaming state. 3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is possible to make the first determination more difficult in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the state in which the first gaming state is set, it is possible to easily perform the game in which the ball is inserted into the third ball entry means, and it is possible to provide the player an easy-to-understand game. .

  In the gaming machine A3, after the first bonus game is executed, a high probability that the probability of being determined to be the specific first determination result by the first determination may be set to be a high probability higher than normal. It has setting means, and when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the gaming state setting means is displayed by the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A4 characterized by setting the first gaming state based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result by the first determination Since the first gaming state is set based on the start, the process until the first gaming state is set can be set in stages. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easy for the player to continuously play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second bonus game is characterized in that fewer benefits can be given to the player than the first bonus game. Machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the second bonus game, since the bonus that can be given to the player is set smaller than that of the first bonus game, the bonus is excessively given to the player while the first gaming state is set. There is an effect that it can control giving.

<Feature B group> (game content and special one, special two set at once)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, first dynamic display period determination means for determining the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination A second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means Second dynamic display means for displaying, second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and identification to the first display means When the first identification information for indicating a first determination result of A bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game when the bonus game is executed and the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means A period determination unit configured to determine a dynamic display period in which the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the first specific determination result is dynamically displayed in the gaming machine; The effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information performed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means, and the effect determined by the effect determining means A game machine B1 having an effect execution means to be executed.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) which is advantageous to the player during a period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (e.g. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, a period during which an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player is set is changed by a lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, executed during the advantageous gaming state If the winning game is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and the winning game is not immediately won by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine having a game characteristic of giving a bonus to the player in a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is largely different. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information performed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination unit is determined by the effect determination unit, the first identification information Since the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information can be executed in association with the dynamic display period, providing the player with the pleasure of predicting the future game based on the effect to be executed. And the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first benefit game. Feature game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the first bonus game by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means It is possible to predict the content. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination The game state setting means has a settable game state setting means, and the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A game machine B3 characterized by executing the first gaming state during a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first gaming state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first bonus game is to be executed, the period until the first bonus game is executed is It is possible to use the game to aim for the second bonus game. Furthermore, since it is possible to predict the period in which the first gaming state is set by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to actively play the game during the first gaming state effective.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the first bonus game is usually the first bonus game as the first bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means, and the small first bonus game has a smaller bonus than the normal first bonus game. And the first dynamic game period setting means is capable of determining a first period and a second period longer than the first period. The effect determining means is configured to execute the small first bonus game by the bonus game executing means and the second period determined by the period determining means, the normal mode by the bonus game executing means. (1) A game machine B4 characterized in that an effect in the same manner is determined in a case where a bonus game is executed and the first period is determined by the period determination means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect determining means is a combination of two elements having different advantageous states for determining the effect content, the effect determining means has the same mode. Since the effect is determined, by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of future gaming situations. Then, it is possible to gradually increase the accuracy of the prediction depending on the degree of progress of the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more enjoyable to predict and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B4, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. A game machine B5 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exerted. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to notify the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

<Feature C group> (Push notification)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, first dynamic display period determination means for determining the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination A second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means Second dynamic display means for displaying, second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and identification to the first display means When the first identification information for indicating a first determination result of A bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game when the bonus game is executed and the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means In the gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination. When the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means and the gaming state setting means, it is played that the first gaming state is set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information A game machine C1 comprising: notification timing determination means for determining a notification timing for notifying a notification mode for showing to a person.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, according to the lottery result, the advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period until the next big hit after the end of the bonus game, and the player is informed that the gaming state has changed The game machine which performs the production | presentation effect was proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute an effect notifying that effect based on the fact that the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, for example, the advantageous gaming state is set Even if it is in the state where it is not possible to execute a new lottery, it is reported that the game playing state is set, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling. was there. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state where the second determination is easily performed is set can be determined based on the dynamic display situation of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling at the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state has been set.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A game machine C2 characterized in that the game state setting means sets the first game state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first gaming state set based on the determination result of the first determination means to be executed separately from the second determination means is notified, notification is made based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information The timing is determined. Therefore, it is possible to combine the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  The gaming machine C2 includes dynamic display determination means for determining whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determination means is configured to When it is determined by the intentional display discrimination means that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is possible to execute the second determination immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to allow the player to play the game in the first gaming state for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, when the notification timing determination unit determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determination unit, the dynamic display of the second identification information is ended. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing at which the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, even if the first gaming state is set, it is not notified that the first gaming state has been set during the period in which the second determination can not be performed, and the second determination can be performed. In this case, it is informed that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second determination can not be performed despite the notification that the first gaming state has been set, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. It has the effect of being able to

  The gaming machine C4 has a remaining period determining means for determining a period from the timing when the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to the end of the first gaming state based on the determination result by the remaining period determining means. A game machine C5 having a notice determination means for determining whether or not the notice timing is determined by the notice timing determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, whether or not to determine the notification timing is determined based on a period in which the second determination can be performed in the first gaming state, so for example, the second determination in the first gaming state When the executable period has become extremely short, it is possible not to inform the player that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, despite notifying the player that the first gaming state has been set, it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from ending in a short period and giving the player an unpleasant feeling. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature D group> (big hit and discard, small hit and pause due to simultaneous fluctuation)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means Is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means is displayed (2) display means, second dynamic display means for causing the second display means to dynamically display the second identification information for a predetermined period, and the first for displaying a first determination result specific to the first display means When the identification information is displayed, the first benefit game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second benefit game is executed. A bonus game execution means to execute, and a plurality of bonus contents of the content of the second bonus game In the gaming machine having a second bonus game type setting unit to set the second identification mode, the second dynamic display unit is in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display unit. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed, and the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means; A game having stop control means for executing stop control on the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means based on the content of the privilege set by the second bonus game type setting means Machine D1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are gaming machines such as pachinko machines having a game characteristic (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type) for simultaneously executing a plurality of lotterys. In the gaming machine having such a game characteristic, when the lottery result of one lottery is a hit, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed, and the other lottery games being executed are forced to be executed. It has been proposed to end the problem (for example, JP 2005-319221 A). By the way, regardless of the type of bonus game, the above-described gaming machine forcibly stops and displays another lottery based on stop display of the lottery result for executing the bonus game. Had the problem of giving discomfort to people. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine D1, since the stop control content for the first dynamic display can be set according to the content of the second benefit game to be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means forcibly displays the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. A game machine D2 capable of executing temporary stop control of stopping measurement of a period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, depending on the content of the second bonus game to be executed, it is possible to set whether to forcibly stop or temporarily stop the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive benefit, and by executing a bonus game to which a small bonus is given, the bonus game to which a large bonus is given is destroyed. Has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second benefit game type setting means can set the first benefit type and the second benefit type that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit type, and the stop A game machine D3 characterized in that the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second bonus game type setting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the second benefit type advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, and therefore, an extra benefit is given to the player. Has the effect of being able to suppress

  In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display performed by the first dynamic display means ends, and the specific first determination It has invalidating means for invalidating the setting of the second benefit type by the second benefit game type setting means until the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed on the first display means A gaming machine D4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second benefit type is invalidated by the invalidation means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the first benefit game and the second benefit game in which the second benefit type is set are continuously executed, and that an extra benefit is given to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second benefit game type setting unit sets the first benefit type and the second benefit type on the basis of the determination result of the second determination unit, and A game machine D5 characterized in that the first benefit type is set more easily than the second benefit type.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first benefit type is more easily set than the second benefit type, it is possible to suppress the player from being given an excessive benefit even if the second benefit game is executed a lot. There is.

<Other thought 1> (The latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means A second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first bonus game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means In the gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game when the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second determination is made easier to be executed than the first determination. The first determination is executed rather than the first gaming state and the second determination Game state setting means capable of setting the second game state to be selected, the game state setting means dynamically displaying the first identification information when a predetermined first condition is satisfied Game machine characterized in that the first gaming state is set in a period, and the first gaming state is set after the first benefit game is ended, when a predetermined second condition is satisfied. E1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) which is advantageous to the player during a period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (e.g. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, a period during which an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player is set is changed by a lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, executed during the advantageous gaming state If the winning game is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and the winning game is not immediately won by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine having a game characteristic of giving a bonus to the player in a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is largely different. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine E1, since the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided before and after the first bonus game, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine γ2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, a gaming machine γ3 characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S306 First Judgment Means S308 Playing State Setting Means S504 First Dynamic Display Period Setting Means S508 First Dynamic Display Means S905 Second Judgment Means S1205 Second Dynamic Display Period Setting Means S1209 Second Dynamic Display Means S2204 Privilege Game Execution means S5109 Effect determination means S5309 Effect execution means S5201 Period determination means

Claims (5)

First determination means capable of performing the first determination;
First display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means;
First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means;
First dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means;
A second determination unit capable of executing a second determination;
Second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means;
Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means;
Second dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means;
When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first bonus game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means A gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game when the second identification information for the second game is displayed;
Period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the first specific determination result is dynamically displayed;
Effect determination means for determining an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information performed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means;
A game machine comprising: effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means.   The effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first benefit game. The gaming machine according to 1). A game state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination Have
The gaming state setting means is configured to display the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the first specific determination result during the dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming state is to be executed. As the first benefit game to be executed by the benefit game execution means, it is possible to set a normal first benefit game and a small first benefit game which has fewer benefits to be given to the player than the normal first benefit game. Has a first bonus game setting means,
The first dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining a first period and a second period longer than the first period,
The effect determining means is configured to execute the small first bonus game by the bonus game executing means and the second period determined by the period determining means, the first normal game by the bonus game executing means. The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein an effect in the same manner is determined in a case where a bonus game is executed and the first period is determined by the period determination means.   The effect determining means determines the specific effect when the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. The gaming machine according to claim 4, characterized in that:

Images